DRAFTING

PRACTICES
(FOR ALL BRANCHES )
REGULATION – 2023

jkpo; kw;Wk; Mq;fpyj;jpy;

FWfpa tpdhf;fs; kw;Wk; tpilfs;

N. IYANARAPPAN, M.E., M.I.S.T.E.

!
!
!

!
 NOTE
THE WATER MARK
KAL PATHIPPAGAM
WILL NOT APPEAR IN
PRINTED TEXT BOOK

KINDLY EXTEND YOUR

SUPPORT BY ORDERING
PRINTED BOOKS IN

KAL PATHIPPAGAM
!
THANK YOU !

!
DRAFTING PRACTICES (FOR ALL BRANCHES)

Copy right © : Publishers

No part of this publication may be stored in a retrieval system, transmitted or reproduced
in any way, including but not limited to photocopy, photograph, magnetic or other record,
without prior agreement and written permission of the publisher.

First Edition : December 2023

M
Price : 238.00

A
G
PA
For Contact :
IP
99446 50380
96266 26747
TH

Publisher :
KAL PATHIPPAGAM
PA

Vellore – 632 011

L
A
K

Type setting :
Students’ Media Computer Graphics
Vellore – 632 011.
 Contents
Page
THEORY No.
Unit – I. Basics of Drawing and Dimensioning ...................................... 01
Unit – II. Geometric Construction and Construction of Polygons ............. 28
Unit – III. Basics of Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) ............................... 42
Unit – IV. Orthographic Views Using CAD ............................................ 102
Basic Civil Engineering Drawings Using CAD .......................... 108
Basic Electrical Wiring Circuits Using CAD ............................. 114
Basic Electronics Circuits Using CAD ..................................... 123

M
EXERCISES

A
G
FOR ALL BRANCHES

PART – A : MANUAL DRAFTING

PA
Ex. No.1(A) – 1(B). Lettering .......................................................... 129
Ex. No.2(A) – 2(D). Dimensioning ................................................... 129
IP

Ex. No.3(A) – 3(C). Geometric Constructions .................................... 129

TH

Ex. No.4(A) – 4(E). Construction of Polygons ................................... 130

PA

PART – B : COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (CAD)

Ex. No.5(A) – 5(D). Drawing and Dimensioning Using CAD ................ 131
L
A

FOR MECHANCIAL ENGINEERING AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY

K

Ex. Nos.6(A) – 6(D). Orthographic Views Using CAD ........................ 147

FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY
Ex. Nos.6(A) – 6(D). Civil Engineering Drawing Using CAD ................ 163
FOR EEE AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY
Ex. Nos.6(A) – 6(D). Electrical Circuit Diagrams Using CAD ................ 187
FOR ECE, COMPUTER ENGINEERING AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY
Ex. Nos.6(A) – 6(D). Electronics Circuit Diagrams Using CAD .............. 203
Short Questions and Answers ⁄⁄⁄⁄⁄⁄......................................... 210
Model Question Papers .................................................................. 245
 DP232270 L T P C
DRAFTING PRACTICES
PRACTICAL 0 0 4 2

COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES

PART – A : MANUAL DRAFTING

[Note : The drawings (Ex.Nos.1 – 4) should be drawn in drawing sheets and the same
should be submitted for evaluation]
Unit – I BASICS OF DRAWING AND DIMENSIONING
Importance of engineering drawing - drawing practice as per BIS code - drawing
instruments: drawing board, mini drafter, drawing sheets, drawing pencils, set squares, etc.
Lettering and numbering as per BIS - single stroke letters - uppercase and lowercase letters. 4
Dimensioning – need for dimensioning - terms and notations as per BIS - parallel, chain
and progressive dimensioning.

M
Ex.No.1.

A
(a) Rewrite the given statement in a single stroke vertical uppercase letters (5 statements) 4

G
(b) Rewrite the given statement in a single stroke vertical lowercase letters (5 statements)

PA
Ex.No.2. Redraw the given drawing and dimension it as per BIS. (Fig.1 – Fig.4) 6
IP
Unit – II GEOMETRIC CONSTRUCTION AND CONSTRUCTION OF POLYGONS
Geometric Constructions : Bisect a straight line, an arc and an angle – divide a straight line
TH

and circle into a number of equal divisions – construct an arc touching two straight lines
at any angle – construct an arc touching two arcs.
PA

Construction of Polygons : Triangle, square, rectangle, pentagon and hexagon – various 4

positions – side of the polygon is parallel, perpendicular and inclined to principal planes.
L

Ex.No.3.
A

(a) Divide a straight line and circle into given number of equal divisions
K

4
(b) Construct an arc touching two straight lines
(c) Construct an arc touching two arcs
Ex.No.4. Construct the polygon of given size (Choose any suitable method)
4
(Triangle, Rectangle, Square, Pentagon and Hexagon)

PART – B : COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING

[Note : The drawings (Fig.1 – Fig.8) should be created using CAD Software and the
printout should be submitted for evaluation]
Unit – III BASICS OF COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING (CAD)
Introduction to CAD – applications – advantages of CAD over manual drafting –
understanding user interface – types of coordinate systems - absolute, relative, polar –
8
drafting settings – Limits – Units – Creating objects using draw commands – Line, Arc,
Circle, Rectangle, Ellipse, Polygon, Point, Pline, Sketch – Creating text – Dtext, Mtext, Text
styles – Mline, spline – Drawing with precision – Osnap options – drawing aids – Fill, Snap,
Grid, Ortho lines – Function keys – Editing and modify commands – Object selection
methods – Erasing object – Oops – Canceling and undoing a command – Copy – Move –
Array – Offset – Scale – Rotate – Mirror – Break – Trim – Extend – Explode – Divide –
Measure – Stretch – Lengthen – Changing properties – Color, Line types, LT scale –
Matching properties – Editing with grips – Pedit – Ddedit – Mledit.
Basic dimensioning – Editing dimensions – Dimension styles – Adding leaders – Creation
of blocks – Wblock – Inserting a block – Block attributes – Hatching – Pattern types –
Boundary hatch – Working with layers – View group commands – Zoom, redraw, regen,
pan – Enquiry tools.
Page setup in layout – Viewports – Plotting drawings.
Ex.No.5. Draw the given drawing and dimension it as per BIS using CAD (Fig.1 – Fig.4) 6

FOR MECHANICAL ENGINEERING AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY

Unit – IV ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS USING CAD

M
Orthographic projections – planes of projection – principal orthographic views – first

A
angle projection – third angle projection – Construction of orthographic views of simple 4

G
components using CAD.
PA
Ex.No.6. Draw the orthographic views of the given component using CAD (Fig.5 – Fig.8) 8
IP
FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY
Unit – IV BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWINGS USING CAD
TH

Important terminologies used in Civil Engineering Drawing – Basic conventional symbols –

PA

materials, doors, windows, stairs, walls, sanitary fittings, etc. – Basic civil engineering 4
drawing using CAD.
Ex.No.6. Draw the given civil engineering drawing using CAD (Fig.5 – Fig.8)
L

(a) Cross sectional view of L -section, T-section, Channel and I - Section

A

(b) Plan, Elevation and Sectional view of a Single storey, Single room building
K

consisting of RCC Flat Roof, Masonry walls, Lintel cum Sunshade, Door and 8
windows of standard size.
(c) Floor plan of a 2BHK residential building.
(d) Plan and Sectional Elevation of a RCC Column with square isolated footings.

FOR EEE AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY

Unit – IV BASIC ELECTRICAL WIRING CIRCUITS USING CAD
Basic electrical symbols - fuse, main switch, electrical bell, earth, SPST, DPST, TPST,
Neutral link, ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter, energy meter, frequency meter, power factor 4
meter, timer, buzzer, MCB, etc. – Drawing of basic electrical circuits diagrams using CAD.
Ex.No.6. Draw the given electric circuit diagram using CAD. (Fig.5 – Fig.8)
(a) Stair-case wiring electric circuit 8
(b) Control and main circuit of automatic star delta starter
 (c) Control circuit for jogging in cage induction motor
(d) Single phase wiring circuit

FOR ECE, COMPUTER ENGINEERING AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY

Unit – IV BASIC ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS USING CAD
Basic electronics symbols - Resistor, Capacitor, Inductor, PN Junction Diode, Zener Diode,
BJT, JFET, MOSFET, GND and VCC, Transformer, Switch, Buzzer, Battery, etc. 4
Drawing of basic electronics circuits diagram using CAD.
Ex.No.6. Draw the given electronics circuit diagram using CAD. (Fig.5 – Fig.8)
(a) Half Wave Rectifier circuit
(b) Bridge Rectifier circuit 8
(c) Common Emitter Amplifier circuit
(d) Fire Alarm circuit

Continuous Assessment Test & Revision 8

M
Total Periods 60

A
G
Note : Suitable drawings should be provided to students for Ex.Nos.2, 5 & 6.
PA
IP
ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY
TH

Continuous Assessment (40 Marks) End Semester

Examination
CA-1 CA-2 CA-3 CA-4 (60 Marks)
PA

Manual Manual Practices and

Model Practical
Mode Drafting Drafting Record of
Examination Examination
L

(Unit – I) (Unit – II) Work done

A

Duration 2 hours 2 hours 3 hours - 3 hours

K

Exam Marks 60 60 100 100 100

Converted to 10 10 10 10 60
Marks 40 60

NOTE :
1) CA-1 : Three questions should be given from Unit – I to draw in the drawing sheet and the
same should be evaluated for 60 Marks. Each question carries 20 Marks.
2) CA-2 : Three questions should be given from Unit – II to draw in the drawing sheet and the
same should be evaluated for 60 Marks. Each question carries 20 Marks.
3) CA-3 : Model Examination for 100 Marks.
4) CA-4 : All exercises [4 Drawing sheets (each 5 marks) + 8 CAD Drawings (each 10 marks)].
The same should be submitted for the board examination as a record of work done.
 BOARD EXAMINATIONS

ALLOCATION OF MARKS

Description Marks
Part – A : Short Answer Questions
25 One mark Questions from Unit – I, II & III (25 x 1 = 25 Marks) ....... 25
Part – B : Computer Aided Drafting
1) Drawing & Dimensioning using CAD from Unit – III
Any one drawing out of four drawings (1 x 25 = 25 Marks) ................ 25
2) Department specific drawing using CAD from Unit – IV
Any one drawing out of four drawings (1 x 45 = 45 Marks) ................ 45
Viva – voce ........................................................................................................ 5

M
Total Marks 100

A
G
PA
DRAWINGS FOR LAB EXERCISES
IP
TH

COMMON FOR ALL BRANCHES (All dimensions are in mm)

80 10 50
PA

30R
30R
10R
25
30

20 10 20
25
L
40

30
80
A

10Ø
25

30Ø SEMICIRCLE
K

40
10

20
20

20
30 60°

Fig.1 Fig.2
125
10

100 80Ø
Ø30
10

55
Ø12
30

20
110

15Ø
15R 25
Ø40
30
15

165 25

Fig.3 Fig.4
FOR MECHANICAL ENGINEERING AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY

Fig.5 Fig.6

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.7 Fig.8
FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY
60

5
25

T - Section

100
L - Section
ISJT 100
200

ISA 200200

25
200 3.7

M
Scale - 1:5 Scale - 1:2

A
100

13.7
PA
IP
TH
PA
L

450
400

8.6
A

11.3
K

Channel - Section I - Section

ISMC 400 ISHB 450
15.3

250
Scale - 1:5
ScaleScale
- 1:4 – 1:5

All dimensions are in mm

Fig.5. Cross sectional view of L -section, T-section, Channel section and I- Section
 M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.6. Plan, Elevation and Sectional view of a single storey building with single room
 230 230
W1 V V W1
230
D3

1385 X 3000

1385 X 3000
BATH & WC

BATH & WC
BED ROOM BED ROOM
W1 W1
3000 X 3000 3000 X 3000

D3

6690
230 D2 D2

A
G
D2 O

LIVING ROOM
PA
DINING ROOM KITCHEN
W1 W1
IP
3000 X 3000 3000 X 3000 3000 X 3000
TH
PA

230 D1
W1 W1
L

9920
A

Window (W) - 900 mm x 1200 mm Door (D1) - 1200 mm x 2100 mm

K

Ventilator (V) - 600 mm x 600 mm Door (D2) - 1000 mm x 2100 mm

Door (D3) - 800 mm x 2100 mm

SCALE – 1:100

All dimensions are in mm

Fig.7. Floor plan of 2 BHK residential building

 400

Main column reinforcements

(4 Nos. - 25mm Dia.)
GL GL

Ties - 8mm Dia.,

300mm c/c spacing
1000

Footing main
reinforcement
600

(16 Nos. - 16mm Dia.)

400

M
190
A
G
SECTIONAL ELEVATION OF COLUMN AND FOOTINGS
PA
IP
TH
PA

Footing main
reinforcement
(16 Nos. - 16mm Dia.)
L
A
K
2400

320
400

Square column

2400
Scale - 1: 25
PLAN OF FOOTINGS All dimensions are in mm

Fig.8. RCC column with square isolated footing

FOR EEE AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY

L1 L2 L3

N
P

M
A
G
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6

SB1 SB 2
PA SB3 SB4
IP
TH

N - Neutral
P - Phase
SB - Switch Board
PA

S - Switch
L - Light Bulb
L

Fig.5. Staircase wiring electric circuit

A
K
 3 Phase, 440 V - AC Supply
R Y B

TPST
Switch

5A FUSE

START T1
STOP
D4
S

M
S4

A
G
OLR
M4

PA M
M1 M2 M3
IP
TH

ON - DELAY
T
A1 B1 C1
PA
STATOR

D1 D2 D3
S5
L

D
A

A2 B2 C2
K

S1 S2 S3
TPST - Three Pole, Single Throw
OLR - Over Load Relay
M - Main contactor
S - Star contactor
D - Delta contactor
ROTOR T - Timer

Fig.6. Control and main circuit for automatic star delta starter
 3 Phase, 440 V - AC Supply
R Y B

TPST
Switch

5A FUSE

M
A
START

G
JR

M1 M2 M3 PA
M4 JR1
IP
TH

STOP JOG
OLR
M
PA

OLR

JR2
L
A
STATOR

TPST - Three Pole, Single Throw

OLR - Over Load Relay
M - Main contactor, Motor
JR - Jog Relay

ROTOR

Fig.7. Control circuit for jogging in cage induction motor

 Sub Circuit-1

Sub Circuit-2

Sub Circuit-3

To Motor
Indicator
Lamp

Energy Meter

ICDP

Neutral
Switch 6A
SP
MCP

Phase
20A DP

M
MCP
Phase

A
Cut-out Earth

G
From O.H Line
Distribution
Neutral PA O.H Line - Over Head Line
Board
IP
ICDP - Iron Clad, Double Pole
SP - Single Pole
TH

DP - Double Pole
MCB - Miniature Breaking Circuit
PA

Fig.8. Single phase wiring circuit

L
A
K
FOR ECE, COMPUTER ENGINEERING AND ALLIED COURSES ONLY

Diode

AC DC
Input Load Output

Transformer

M
Fig.5. Half wave rectifier circuit

A
G
PA
IP
TH

D4
PA

D1

AC
L

Input
A
K

D2 D3 DC
Load Output

Transformer

Fig.6. Bridge rectifier circuit

 +V cc

R1 RL

IC
VOut
C1
IB

IE
Vin

R2 RE C2

M
A
0v

G
PA
Fig.3
Fig.7. Common emitter amplifier circuit
IP
TH
PA

110 ohms
(Thermistor)
L

Buzzer
A

Switch
K

R1
(3.3 K)
BC 548
+ 9V
Battery
_

Zener Diode 4.7V

R2
(100 ohms)

Fig.8. Fire alarm circuit

K
A
L
PA
TH
IP
PA
G
A
M
K
A
L
PA
TH
IP
PA
G
A
M
 Unit – I
BASICS OF DRAWING AND DIMENSIONING
1.1 Importance of engineering drawing
Engineering drawing is the language of engineers. By means of drawing, the shape, size,
finish, colour, and construction of any object can be described accurately and clearly. Hence,
drawing is a way for communicating engineer’s ideas, designs, and thoughts to others. It is
necessary for the engineers to develop their skills in preparing engineering drawings.

1.2 BIS codes for engineering drawing

Engineering drawing is a common language used by engineers throughout the world. Like
other languages, engineering drawing also follows certain rules, regulations and conventions.
These are called standards.
The standards to be used for engineering drawing in India are prescribed by Bureau of Indian
Standards (BIS). The following are the IS codes recommended by BIS for engineering drawing.

M
A
IS code Name of the drawing subject

G
IS 9609 – 1983 English lettering
IS 10711 – 1983 Size of drawing sheet
IS 10713 – 1983 PA
Scales for technical drawings
IS 10714 – 1983 General principle of presentation
IP
IS 11664 – 1983 Folding of drawing prints
TH

IS 11665 – 1985 Title block

IS 11669 – 1986 General principle of dimensioning
PA

1.3 Drawing instruments and materials

Drawing instruments are used to prepare engineering drawings accurately and easily. The
L

accuracy and neatness of the drawings depend on the quality of the instruments used. The
A

following are the list of instruments and other materials required for engineering drawing.
K

1) Drawing board 9) Drawing paper

2) T – square 10) Drawing pencils
3) Set squares 11) Sand paper block
4) Clinograph 12) Pencil eraser (Rubber)
5) Protractor 13) Paper fasteners (Pins, tape or clips)
6) Scales 14) Duster
7) French curves 15) Mini–drafter
8) Instrument box

1) Drawing board
A drawing board is rectangular in shape. It is made of strips of well seasoned soft wood
such as oak or pine. The strips are joined together by two battens at the back to prevent warping.
An ebony strip is fitted on one edge of the board. This edge is perfectly straight and is called as
working edge. T–square head is made to slide against the ebony edge. The ebony edge has a
saw cut along its length to prevent contraction and expansion due to atmospheric changes.

1
 Slotted holes

Bottom strips

Battens

Ebony working edge

Fig.1 Drawing board
The standard sizes of drawing boards recommended by BIS are given below.
Board size in mm Suitable
Designation
Length x Width x Thickness Drawing sheet size

M
D0 1500 x 1000 x 25 A0

A
D1 1000 x 700 x 25 A1

G
D2 700 x 500 x 15 A2
D3 PA
500 x 350 x 15 A3
IP
2) T – Square
TH
PA
L
A

Blade
K

Fig.2 T– square

T–square is made in the form of “T” by using hard wood. It consists of a stock and a blade.
These two parts are joined together at right angles to each other by means of screws and pins.
The working edge of T–square should be perfectly straight. The stock is placed adjoining the
working edge of the board and is made to slide on it when required. The blade is pressed firmly
against the drawing sheet.
T–square is mainly used to draw horizontal lines. Set–squares may be made to slide over
the working edge of the T–square to draw perpendicular, parallel and inclined lines.

3) Set–squares or triangles
The set–squares or triangles are made of wood, transparent celluloid or plastic. The two
forms of set–squares generally used are 45o set–square and 30o– 60o set–square.

2
 30°

45°

90° 45° 90° 60°

Fig.3 Set squares

The two edges of each set square are made at right angles and are graduated in mm. Some

M
set–squares may have French curves cut in them. Set–squares are used to draw all straight lines.

A
Vertical lines can be drawn by using set–squares along with the T–square. Lines with an angle of
15o, 30o, 45o, 60o, 75o, 105o, etc. can be drawn with the combination of T–square and set–squares.

G
4) Clinograph PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A

Fig.4 Clinograph
K

Clinograph is an adjustable set–square. It has two fixed edges at 90o. The third edge is hinged
and can be adjusted to any required inclination. This is used to draw parallel lines at any inclination.

5) Protractor

80 90 100
110
70
90 12
60 100 80
70 0
110 13
50 0 60 0
12
0 50
13
14
40

0
0

40
14

15
30

0
0

30
15

160
20
160

20

170
10

180 170

10

180
0
0

Fig.5 Protractor

3
 Protractor is made of wood, tin, celluloid or transparent plastics. It is generally available
in flat semi–circular and circular shapes. The normal size is 100mm diameter. The beveled
circumferential edge is graduated in 1o divisions and numbered at every 10o intervals. The
readings can be taken both in clockwise and anticlockwise directions. It is used to measure or
draw angles which cannot be drawn by set–squares. Protractor is also used to divide the circle
into a number of equal parts.

6) Scales
Scales are used for transferring and measuring distances or lengths on a drawing. They
are made of wood, celluloid, plastic, card–board, etc. Flat card–board scales of 300mm length,
30mm width, and 1mm thick are commonly used. Wooden and plastic scales are thicker than
card–board scales and their longer edges are beveled. Both the longer edges of the scales are
graduated with different divisions and sub–divisions.

The representative fraction such as 1:2, 1:10, 10:1, etc. is marked on the scale. The scales
generally used in engineering drawings are:

M
Full scale 1:1

A
Reducing scales 1:2, 1:2.5, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20, 1:50, 1:100, 1:200

G
Enlarging scales 10:1, 5:1, 2:1

7) French curves
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.6 French curves

French curves are used to draw curves and other than circular arcs, which cannot be drawn
with a compass. They are made of wood, plastic or transparent celluloid. They are available in
various shapes. French curves are cut in the middle of some set–squares also.

8) Drawing instrument box

Drawing instrument box contains the following instruments.
(i) Large size compass (ii) Lengthening bar
(iii) Small bow compass (iv) Large size divider
(v) Small bow divider (vi) Small bow ink–pen
(vii) Inking pen

4
(i) Large size compass

Fig.7 Large bow compass

M
This compass is used for drawing circles and arcs of circles. It consists of two legs hinged

A
together at its upper end. A pointed needle is fitted at the lower end of one leg and a pencil lead

G
is inserted at the end of the other leg. Both the legs are provided with knee joints. Circles up to
PA
about 120mm diameter can be drawn with the legs of the compass kept straight. For drawing
large circles, both the legs should be bent at the knee joints so that they are perpendicular to
IP
the surface of the paper. The needle is kept longer than the lead point, because the needle is
required to be inserted slightly inside the paper.
TH

(ii) Lengthening bar

PA
L
A
K

Fig.8 Lengthening bar

Circles more than 150mm radius are drawn with the help of the lengthening bar. The lower
part of the pencil leg is detached and the lengthening bar is inserted in its place. The detached
part is then fitted at the end of the lengthening bar, thus increasing the length of the pencil leg.

(iii) Small bow compass

Small bow compass is used for drawing circles and arcs of less than 25mm radius. It is
particularly used to draw a large number of small circles of the same diameter. It consists of a
pointed needle leg and a pencil lead leg. The two legs are joined through a torsion spring at their
ends. An adjustable screw is provided to adjust the distance between these two legs.

5
(iv) Large size divider
The divider has two legs hinged at the upper end. Each leg has needle points at the lower
end. It does not have the knee joint as in a compass. The dividers are used
To divide curves or straight lines into required number of equal parts
To transfer dimension from one part of the drawing to another part
To set–off given dimension from the scale to the drawing.

(v) Small bow divider

Small bow divider is used for making minute divisions and large number of equal distances.
An adjustable screw is provided to change the distance between the two legs.

M
A
G
Knob
PA
Screw
IP
steel nib
Ink Scale
TH

Paper
PA

Fig.9 Small bow compass Fig.10 Divider Fig.11 Inking pen

(vi) Small bow ink–pen

L

It is used for drawing small circles and arcs in ink.

A
K

(vii) Inking pen

It is used for drawing straight lines and non–circular arcs in ink. It consists of a pair of
steel nibs fitted to a metal holder. Ink is filled between the two nibs to about 6mm height. The
gap between the nib blades can be adjusted by means of a screw. This is done to get the required
line thickness.

9) Drawing paper
Drawing papers are available in many varieties. For ordinary pencil drawings, the paper
selected should be uniform in thickness and as white as possible. Good quality paper with smooth
surface should be selected for drawings which are to be inked and preserved for a long time.
Thin and cheap quality papers may be used for drawings from which tracing are to be prepared.

The ratio of length and width of a paper is 1: √2. Successive sizes are obtained by dividing
along the length. The surface area of A0 size is one square meter. The areas of the two sizes are
in the ratio 1:2.

6
The following are the standard sizes of drawing papers recommended by BIS.

Sheet Trimmed size Untrimmed size

Designation Width x Length (mm) Width x Length (mm) A3
A0 841 x 1189 880 x 1230 A2

A1 594 x 841 625 x 880 A4

A5
A0
A2 420 x 594 450 x 625
A3 297 x 420 330 x 450
A1
A4 210 x 297 240 X 330
A5 148 x 210 165 x 240

10) Drawing pencils

The accuracy, neatness, and appearance of drawings depend very much on the quality of
the drawing pencils used. The grade of a pencil lead is usually shown by figure and letters at one
of its ends. Letters HB indicate the medium grade. The grades H, 2H, 3H, etc. indicate the degree

M
of hardness in increasing order. The grades B, 2B, 3B, etc. indicate the degree of softness in an

A
increasing order. The uses of different grade pencils are listed below.

G
Pencil grade Uses
3H pencil Guide lines for lettering. PA
2H pencil For construction lines, dimension lines, leader lines, section lines, and centre lines.
IP
H pencil For object lines, lettering and dimensioning.
TH

HB pencil For free hand sketching, arrow heads, dimensioning and lettering.
PA
10
L
A
K

(a) (b) Chisel edge (c) Conical point

Fig.12 Drawing pencils

The pencil lead may be sharpened to two different shapes:

• Conical point: It is used in sketch works, lettering, etc.
• Chisel edge: It is used for drawing lines of uniform thickness and hence it is suitable
for drawing work.

7
11) Sand paper block
It consists of a wooden block about 150mm x 50mm x 12mm thick. A piece of sand paper
is pasted or nailed on about half of its length. The pencil lead should occasionally be rubbed on
the sand paper block to maintain the same thickness of the chisel edge or the pointed end.

12) Pencil eraser (Rubber)

The eraser made of soft India rubber is mostly used for pencil drawings. Eraser is used to
remove the unwanted lines and lines drawn by mistake. The rubber should be such as not to
spoil the surface of the paper. Frequent use of rubber should be avoided by careful planning.

13) Paper fasteners

Drawing pins, adhesive tapes or spring clips are generally used for fixing the drawing sheet
on the drawing board. These are called paper fasteners. Adhesive tape and spring clips are widely
used. Adhesive tape does not obstruct the free movement of T–square, set–square or mini–
drafter. Fixing and removal of sheets become easier with spring clips.

14) Duster

M
Duster is used for cleaning the mini–drafter, set–square and other instruments and the

A
surface of the drawing sheet before starting the work and also during the work. Duster may be

G
a towel cloth or hand kerchief. The rubber crumbs formed after the use of rubber should be
cleaned by the duster.
PA
15) Mini–drafter
IP
TH

Drawing board edge

Clamp
PA
L

Link
mechanism
A
K

Blade

Protractor head
Knob

Fig.13 Mini–drafter

Mini–drafter is a miniature form of drafting machine. The uses and advantages of the
T–square, set–squares, scales and the protractor are combined in the mini–drafter. Its one end
is clamped by means of a screw, to the distant longer edge of the drawing board. An adjustable
head having protractor markings is fitted at its other end.

8
 Two blades made of transparent celluloid accurately set at right angles to each other are
attached to the protractor head. Scale markings are provided on these two blades. The blades
may be set at any required angle with the help of the protractor markings. The machine has a
mechanism which keeps the two blades always parallel to their original position, whenever they
may be moved on the board.

By using mini–drafter, horizontal, vertical, inclined, parallel, and perpendicular lines of required
length can be drawn anywhere on the sheet easily. It considerably reduces the drafting time.

1.4 Lettering and numbering

Importance of legible lettering
Writing of titles, sub–titles, bill of materials, dimensions, notes, and other important
particulars on a drawing is known as lettering.

Poor lettering spoils the appearance and the usefulness of the drawing. Therefore, in an
engineering drawing, lettering should be legible, clear, and uniform. Lettering should be in plain
and simple style so that it can be done freehand with speed.

M
Single stroke letters

A
When the thickness of the lines of the letters is obtained in one stroke of the pencil, then

G
they are called single stroke letters. The word single stroke does not mean that the letters should
be made in one stroke without lifting the pencil. PA
IP
Single stroke letters are of two types: (i) Vertical letters (ii) Inclined letters. The
lines of inclined letters are drawn at an inclination of 75o with the horizontal.
TH

Size of single stroke letters

PA

The size of letters and numerals is measured by their heights. The ratio of height to width
varies, but in case of most of the letters it is 6:5. The approximate height : width ratio of letters
is tabulated below.
L
A

Height :
K

Letters

ISO 81 ejAM
Width
h

TOM – Q –
c

6:6
VAXY d a e
W 6:8
1&I 6:1
b

All other
R f
h

letters
6:5
and
Fig.14 Size of single stroke letters
numerals

According to the height of letters, they are classified as: (i) Lettering ‘A’ type (ii) Lettering ‘B’ type
In lettering ‘A’ type, the height of the capital letter is divided into 14 parts.
In lettering ‘B’ type, it is divided into 10 parts.

9
 h
Lettering ‘A’ type o d= p
14

Characteristic Ratio Dimensions (mm)

14
Height of capital letters h o ph 2.5 3.5 5 7 10 14 20
14
10
Height of lower case letters c o ph – 2.5 3.5 5 7 10 14
14
2
Spacing between characters a o ph 0.35 0.5 0.7 1 1.4 2 2.8
14
20
Minimum spacing of base lines b o ph 3.5 5 7 10 14 20 28
14

6
Minimum spacing between words e o ph 1.05 1.5 2.1 3 4.2 6 8.4
14
1
o ph

M
Thickness of lines d 14
0.18 0.25 0.35 0.5 0.7 1 1.4

A
G
h
o p
Lettering ‘B’ type d=
10 PA
IP
Characteristic Ratio Dimensions (mm)
TH

10
Height of capital letters h o ph 2.5 3.5 5 7 10 14 20
10
PA

7
Height of lower case letters c o ph – 2.5 3.5 5 7 10 14
10
2
o ph
L

Spacing between characters a 10

0.5 0.7 1 1.4 2 2.8 4
A
K

14
Minimum spacing of base lines b o ph 3.5 5 7 10 14 20 28
10
6
Minimum spacing between words e o ph 1.5 2.1 3 4.2 6 8.4 12
10
1
Thickness of lines d o ph 0.25 0.35 0.5 0.7 1 1.4 2
10

10
 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
PQRSTUVWXYZ
abcedfghijklmno
5h
h

pqrstuvwxyz
1234567890

M
A
I II V X VIII
G
PA
Fig.15(a) Specimen of vertical letters and numerals
IP
TH

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO 75°
PA

PQRSTUVWXYZ
L
A
K

abcedfghijklmno
5h
h

pqrstuvwxyz
1234567890
I II V X VIII
Fig.15(b) Specimen of inclined letters and numerals

11
 10
ASSEMBLY OF MOTOR
K
8
A
DETAILSL OF SCREW JACK
PA
7
TH
ELEVATION, PLAN

12
IP AND SIDE VIEW
PA
6
CONSTRUCTION PLAN G OF BUILDING
A
M
5
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm

Fig.15(c) Example of single stroke lettering (Capital Letters)

 10
Architectural Drawing
K
8
A
Tube light
L wiring circuit
PA
7
TH

13
Circuit diagram Iof bridge rectifier
PP
6
A
25 Deep
Ø10 - 4 Holes, G
A
M
5
All unmentioned fillet radii 3 mm

Fig.15(d) Example of single stroke lettering (Small Letters)

Recommended height of letters
The following are the recommended height of letters for various purposes

Description Height of letters

Drawing number in title block
10mm to 12mm
and letters denoting cutting plane section
Main title of drawing 6mm to 8mm
Sub–titles 3mm to 6mm
Notes and dimension figures 3mm to 5mm

Lettering procedure
Lettering is freehand drawing and not writing. The following procedure is suggested to
make any type of lettering.

1) Select suitable height (h) of letters.

2) Draw thin and light horizontal parallel guidelines at a distance ‘h’ apart.
3) Draw thin and light vertical or inclined parallel guidelines at a distance equal to the width

M
of letters.

A
4) According to the shape and form of letter, plot lightly all points on guidelines.

G
5) Join these points in proper order by light pencil strokes.
PA
Draw the horizontal lines of the letters from left to right.
Draw vertical, inclined and curved lines from top to bottom.
IP
6) Finally, fair out the letters.
TH

7) Maintain proper spacing between words and sentences.

8) After lettering has been completed, don’t try to erase guidelines.
PA

EXERCISES FOR PRACTICE

L

Write the following statements in a single stroke vertical capital and small letters with
A

6mm, 7mm, 8mm and 10mm heights.

K

1) A drawing can be termed as language of engineers.

2) Mini-drafter is a miniature form of drafting machine.
3) Poor lettering spoils the appearance and usefulness of the drawing.
5) Lettering is freehand drawing and not writing.
6) The standards used in engineering drawings in India are prescribed by BIS.
7) Manual drafting is time consuming and requires services of skilled draughtsman.
8) The final size of the folded drawing sheet will be 297 mm x 210 mm.

1.5 Scales
While preparing drawings, the objects cannot always be shown to their full size. The
drawings of objects are frequently drawn smaller or larger than the actual sizes for the clear
interpretation and handling convenience. It is known as scaling of drawings.
Full scale: When the drawings are drawn to the same size of objects, the scale used is
said to be full scale.

14
 Reducing scale: When the drawings are drawn smaller than the actual size of the
objects, the scale used is said to be reducing scale. Example: Drawings of large machine
parts, building components, architectural drawings, survey maps, bridge structures, etc.

Enlarging scale: When the drawings are drawn larger than the actual size of the
objects, the scale used is said to be enlarging scale. Example: Drawings of small
machine parts, dial gauges, watches, etc.

Recommended scales
The scales recommended by BIS for the use on technical drawings are as follows:
Reducing scales 1:2 1:5 1:10
1:20 1:50 1:100
1:200 1:500 1:1000
1:2000 1:5000 1:10000
Full scale 1:1
Enlarging scales 50:1 20:1 10:1
5:1 2:1

M
1.6 Dimensioning

A
Dimensioning is the process of indicating the sizes and other descriptions on a drawing using

G
lines, figures, letters, symbols, and notes. The dimensioning contains the following information.
PA
Exact length, width, and height of the object.
IP
Sizes and positions of holes, groves, etc.
Distance between surfaces.
TH

Dimensional tolerances.
Surface finish and roughness value.
PA

Material to be used.
Machining processes, etc.
L

Dimensioning of drawings should be done as per the specifications given in IS:11669–

A

1986 (General principles of dimensioning) and IS:10718–1983 (Methods of dimensioning and

K

tolerance codes)

1.6.1 Dimensioning terms and notations

The different terms and notations used in dimensioning are explained below.
Object line or outline: They are thick continuous lines drawn to represent visible edges,
surfaces and surface boundaries of objects.
Dimension line: Dimension line is a thin continuous line. It is terminated by arrowheads
touching the outlines, extension lines or centre lines.
Extension line: An extension line is a thin continuous line drawn in extension of an
outline. It should be extended by about 2mm beyond the dimension line. It is preferred
to keep a gap of about 1mm between the extension line and an outline.
Note: A note gives information regarding specific operation relating to a feature. It
should be always written horizontally.

15
 30

R14

20
Note Object line

Ø20 -2 HOLES

Leader line

40
20
Centre line

20 20

M
80

A
Dimension line Dimension Arrow head

G
PA
Fig.1 Dimensioning terms and notations

Leader line: It is a thin continuous line connecting a note or a dimension figure. Leader
IP
line should terminate with a dot if it ends within outlines of an object. It should terminate
TH

with an arrowhead if it ends on the outline of an object. It should terminate without dot
or arrowhead if it ends on a dimension line.
PA
L
A
K

Fig.2 Leader line

Termination of dimension line

20 20 20 5 20 8

Fig.3 Termination of dimension line

Dimension lines are terminated by arrowheads, oblique strokes or an origin indication.

Arrowhead: It is placed at each end of a dimension line. The length of the arrowhead
should be about three times its maximum width. The arrowhead may be open, closed or
closed and filled.
Oblique stroke: Oblique stroke is drawn as a short line inclined at 45o
Origin indication: It is drawn as a small open circle of approximately 3mm diameter.

16
 Oblique stroke

1
3

Origin indication

Arrow heads

Fig.4 Origin indication

Only one type of arrowhead termination should be used on a single drawing. But, where
space is insufficient for an arrowhead, the oblique stroke or a dot may be used.

1.6.2 Dimensioning Systems (Placement of dimensions)

M
Method – I (Aligned system)

A
30

G
R15
PA 75°
20

15
IP 15

Ø20

60
45°

°
TH

15
PA 24
20

45°
15

15

°
90
20 45°
L

80
A

(a) (b)
K

Fig.5 Aligned system of dimensioning

In this method, the dimension is placed parallel to the dimension line in such a way that
it may be read from the bottom edge or the right–hand edge of the drawing sheet. The
dimensions should be placed near the middle and above the dimension line. in this method,
angles are dimensioned as shown in fig.5(b)

Method – II (Unidirectional system)

In this method, all the dimensions are placed in such a way that they can be read from
the bottom of the edge of the drawing sheet. The dimension lines may be broken near the middle
for inserting the dimension. In this method, angles are dimensioned as shown in fig.6(b)

17
 30

R15 75°
75°
20
60°
60° 45°
Ø20 45°

45° 45°
24
20 90°
90°
45°
45°
20
80

(a) (b)

M
Fig.6 Unidirectional system of dimensioning

A
G
1.6.3 Methods of dimensioning

1) Continuous or chain dimensioning PA

In this method, dimensions are arranged in
IP
a straight line. The first extension line of the
TH

succeeding dimension will be the second extension 20

line of the preceding dimension.
35
PA

55

Fig.7 Continuous or chain dimensioning

L

2) Parallel dimensioning (or)

A

Baseline dimensioning
K

In this method, a number of dimensions are

indicated from a common datum. The dimension
lines are placed parallel to one another. 20 15 20

Fig.8 Parallel dimensioning

3) Progressive dimensioning

This method is simple and used where there

is no risk of confusion. In this method, the datum
line is indicated by an origin indication (or a dot)
and the zero sign. The dimensions are placed
20

35

55
0

progressively from the datum.

Fig.9 Progressive dimensioning

18
4) Coordinate dimensioning
In this method the coordinate values
and sizes of various features in a drawing are
separately tabulated. It results in a neat and 2 5
clear presentation of drawing.
Y
3
1 2 3 4 5
1 4
X 20 20 40 60 60

0
0 X
Y 10 30 20 10 30
Fig.10 Coordinate dimensioning
φ 6 6 10 6 6

1.6.4 Dimensioning of common features

1) Circles
Ø15

M
Ø10 Ø20

A
G
PA
IP
Fig.11 Dimensioning of circles
TH

A circle is dimensioned by specifying its diameter value. The dimension should always be
preceded by the symbol φ. Fig.11 shows various methods of dimensioning different sizes of circles.
PA

2) Arcs
R8
L
A
K

R3
5

R5
2
R1

R3 R10

Fig.12 Dimensioning of arcs

An arc is dimensioned by specifying its radius value. The dimension should always be
preceded by the letter R. Dimension line for the radius should pass through the centre of the arc
and terminated with only one arrowhead.

While dimensioning a small radius, the arrowhead may be reversed.

When the centre of an arc lies outside the limits of the drawings, the dimension line of
the radius should be broken according to whether or not it is necessary to locate the
centre.

19
3) Holes
Ø15, 20 DEEP

Ø10, 4 HOLES

Fig.13 Dimensioning of holes

Hole sizes are dimensioned with their diameters along with the depth of the hole.

4) Chamfers
Chamfers with angle other than 30o

M
are dimensioned as shown in the fig.14(a).

A
Chamfers with angle 45o are dimensioned

17
as shown in fig.14(b). Internal chamfers

G
are dimensioned as shown in fig.14(c).
PA 3
30°

30°
IP
(a)
TH
PA

2 x 45°
L
A

2 x 45°
K

2 x 45° 2 x 45°
(b) (c)
Fig.14 Dimensioning of chamfers

5) Angles

12
0°
45°

60° 60°

Fig.15 Dimensioning of angles

Angles are dimensioned as shown in fig.15.

20
6) Chord and arcs
33 60° 36

Chord Angle Arc length

Fig.16 Dimensioning of chords and arcs

Chords and arcs are dimensioned as shown in fig.16. Chordal dimension refers to the straight
distance. The arc length is dimensioned by placing ∩ symbol above the dimension figure.

7) Bent parts

M
32

A
16
50

G
150 °
PA R3 R3

13
IP
3 3
TH

50
PA

Fig.17 Dimensioning of bent parts

Bent parts are dimensioned as shown in fig.17.

L
A

8) Tapers
K

30 30 30

15°
Ø40

Ø40

Ø20

Ø20

Taper 1:4

Fig.18 Dimensioning of tapers

Tapers are dimensioned as shown in fig.18.

9) Counter sunk holes

Counter sunk holes are dimensioned as shown in fig.19.

21
 Ø14

Ø20

Ø14

90°
3 3

Fig.19 Dimensioning of counter sunk holes

10) Equidistant feature

M
A
G
PA
3 x 20 (= 60)
18
IP
TH

Fig.20 Dimensioning of equidistant feature

When equidistant or regularly arranged elements appear on a drawing, the dimensioning

PA

may be simplified as shown in fig.20.

11) Repeated features

L

To avoid repeating the same dimensional value of a feature, it may be dimensioned as

A

shown in fig.21.
K

Ø20, 6 HOLES

Fig.21 Dimensioning of repeated features

22
1.8.5 Addition of symbols and letters
SØ25
R5
R7
SR7

Ø10

Ø20

10
Diameter Radius Square Spherical diameter Spherical radius

Fig.22 Addition of symbols and letters

The symbol φ should be placed before a dimension for a diameter.

The letter R should be placed before a dimension for a radius.

The symbol □ should be placed before a dimension for a square.

The radius and diameter dimension of a spherical surface should be preceded by the
letter SR and Sφ respectively.

M
A
G
1.8.6 Important dimensioning rules

Dimensioning rule PA Illustration

IP
1) Dimensions should be placed outside the
views
TH
16

16
24
PA

24

Incorrect Correct
L

2) Larger dimensions should be placed

A

outside shorter one

K

24 8
8 24
Incorrect Correct

3) Dimension lines should be drawn at least

8mm away from the outline and from
8
each other.
8
8

8
Incorrect Correct

23
 Dimensioning rule Illustration
4) Crossing of dimension lines should be
avoided. But extension line may cross
each other.
8
24 8
24
Incorrect Correct

5) An overall dimension should be placed

outside a series of smaller dimensions.
One smaller dimension should be
omitted. 8 8 8 8 8
24
Poor practice Good practice

6) When there are several parallel

M
dimension lines, the dimension figures
should be staggered to avoid confusion.

A
8 8
16 16

G
24 24

PA Poor practice Good practice

IP
7) Dimensions are to be given from the
visible outlines rather than from hidden
TH

lines.
8
PA

8
L

Poor practice Good practice

A

8) An axis line or outline should never be

K

used as dimension line. But the axis line 12

16 16
may be used as extension line.
12
Incorrect Correct
Incorrect Ø5, 2Correct
HOLES
9) Holes should be dimensioned in the view Ø5, 2 HOLES

in which they appear as circles. They

should be located by their centre lines.

7 12

5 5
Poor practice Good practice

24
 Dimensioning rule Illustration
10) All dimensions for one particular 20
Ø6, DEEP 20
operation, such as diameter and depth of
drilled hole, should be given in one view

Ø6
only.

Poor practice Good practice

11) Same dimension of an object should not

8
be repeated in different views.
24 24

4
24
Poor practice Good practice

12) The dimension line should not be broken

M
even though the object is broken.

A
G
Incorrect Correct

PA
0
13) Notes should always be written

P2
Ø10, DEEP 20

EE
horizontally.
D
0,
IP
Ø1
TH

Incorrect Correct
PA

Incorrect Correct
14) Leader line should not be vertical, Ø10
Ø10

Ø6 Ø6, 2 HOLES
horizontal or curved. Straight leader
L

inclined at 30O, 45O, or 60O with the Ø6

A

horizontal should be used.

K

Incorrect Correct

15) When all the dimensions are given in 30mm 30

millimeters, the abbreviation mm should
be avoided. A note should be given in the
20mm

drawing as “ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN

20

mm”.
All dimensions are in mm
Poor practice Good practice

25
 SOLVED PROBLEMS
Read the dimensioned drawing shown in the following figures. Redraw the figures to full size and
☞ dimension them as per Indian Standards (BIS).

☞ Problem: 1 ✍20 Solution: 30 Ø20, 2 HOLES

20 10 20

30
40
40

25
25

40

M
10

30

A
40

G
70

Mistakes in dimensioning of the given drawing.

PA
IP
1) A number of dimensions are placed inside the drawing.
2) Some dimension lines cross with some other dimension lines.
TH

3) Diameter of the holes is not indicated properly.

PA

4) Centre lines of the holes are not shown properly.

5) Extensions of outlines of the drawing are used as dimension lines (dimension 30 and 10)
which is not permissible.
L

6) The dimensions (10) inside the drawing are not given from a base line or the centre line
A

of holes.
K

☞ Problem: 2 ✍ Solution:
80 10 50
80 10 50 25
R30
30R
30R
10R
25

25
30

30

25
30 Ø10
80
80

10Ø Ø20
30Ø SEMICIRCLE
20
20

20

20

20

60° 60°

20 20 R15

26
☞ Problem: 3 ✍ Solution:125
100
125
100 Ø15
80Ø R40

55 Ø40
110

110
15Ø
Ø40
15

15
165 55

165

M
☞ ✍

A
G
☞ Problem: 4 ✍ Solution:
PA R15
10

Ø12, 2 HOLES

10
Ø30
IP
10

10
Ø12
TH
30

20

30

20
PA

15R 25

30
L
A

25 R15
10 30 25
K

27
 Unit – II

GEOMETRIC CONSTRUCTIONS AND

CONSTRUCTION OF POLYGONS
2.1 Introduction
Preparation of engineering drawing involves a series of geometrical constructions based
on plane geometry. Hence, it is essential that all engineers must be familiar with geometrical
constructions so that they may use them advantageously while preparing engineering drawings.

2.2 Plane figures

Triangles
A triangle is a plane figure bounded by three straight lines and the sum of the interior

M
angles is always 180°. Different types of triangles are shown in fig.1.

A
G
PA
IP
TH

(a) (b) (c) (d)

PA

Fig.1 Triangles

a) Equilateral triangle: All sides equal and all angles equal.

L

b) Isosceles triangle: Two sides equal and two angles equal.

A

c) Scalene triangle: No sides equal and no angles equal.

K

d) Right angle triangle: Any one angle 90°.

Quadrilaterals
A quadrilateral is a plane figure bounded by four straight lines. If the opposite sides are
parallel, the quadrilateral is called a parallelogram.

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

Fig.2 Quadrilaterals

Different types of quadrilaterals are shown in fig.2.

28
 a) Square: All sides equal, adjacent sides perpendicular.
b) Rectangle: Opposite sides equal, adjacent sides perpendicular.
c) Rhombus: All sides equal, opposite sides parallel and opposite angles equal.
d) Rhomboid: Opposite sides parallel and equal, opposite angles equal.
e) Trapezium: Two sides parallel.
f) Trapezoid: No sides parallel.

Polygons
A plane figure bounded by a number of straight lines is called a polygon. If the polygon has
equal sides and equal angles, it is known as regular polygon. A regular polygon can be inscribed
in or circumscribed about a circle. The different polygons are:

a) Triangle : 3 sides b) Square : 4 sides

c) Pentagon : 5 sides d) Hexagon : 6 sides
e) Heptagon : 7 sides f) Octagon : 8 sides

M
g) Nonagon : 9 sides h) Decagon : 10 sides

A
i) Dodecagon : 12 sides

G
Parts of a circle
Fig.3 shows the parts in a circle.
PA
IP
Chord: It is a straight line joining any two points on the
circumference of a circle Segment
TH

Segment: It is a portion of a circle which is bounded by a chord Chord

PA

and an arc.
Sector
Sector: It is a portion of a circle which is bounded by two radii and
L

the corresponding arc.

A

Fig.3 Parts of a circle

K

2.3 Geometrical constructions

Example:1
☞ To bisect a given straight line
✍ Solution:
1) Let AB be the given line.
2) With A as centre and radius greater than half AB, draw arcs on both sides of AB.
3) With B as centre and same radius, draw arcs intersecting the previous arcs on both sides
at C and D.
4) Draw a line joining C and D. The line CD bisects the line AB at E. Also CD bisects AB at right
angles.

29
 C
C
E
90° A B
A B
E

D
D
O
Fig.4 Bisecting a line Fig.5 Bisecting an arc

Example:2
☞ To bisect a given arc
✍ Solution:
1) Let AB be the arc drawn with centre O.

M
2) With A as centre and radius greater than half AB, draw arcs on both sides of AB.

A
3) With B as centre and same radius, draw arcs intersecting the previous arcs on both sides

G
at C and D.

PA
4) Draw a line joining C and D. The line CD bisects the arc AB at E. The bisector CD, if produced,
will pass through the centre O.
IP
Example:3
TH

☞ To divide a given straight line into any number of equal parts.

PA

✍ Solution:
7' C
L

6'
A

5'
K

4'
3'
2'
1'
A B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Fig.6 Dividing a straight line
1) Let AB be the given line to be divided into 7 equal part.
2) Draw a line AC of any length inclined at some convenient angle to AB (preferably an acute
angle)
3) From A, cut–off seven equal divisions of convenient length, along the line AC using a divider.
4) Draw a line joining B and 7.
5) Draw lines through 1,2,3,etc., parallel to B7. These lines intersect AB at points 1’,2’,3’,etc.,
thus dividing it into seven equal parts.

30
Example:4
☞ To bisect an angle
A
✍ Solution:
1) Let ∠ABC be the given angle.
2) With B as centre and any radius, draw an arc cutting AB at
D and BC at E. D
3) With centres D and E, and radius greater than DE, draw F
arcs intersecting each other at F.
4) Draw a line joining F and B. The line FB bisects the angle
ABC i.e. ∠FBA = ∠ FBC = ½∠ABC B E C
Fig.7 Bisecting an angle

Example:5
☞ To divide a circle into number of equal divisions.

M
A
✍ Solution:

G
7
PA 6
8
IP
TH

45°
PA

5
1
L
A
K

4
2

3
Fig.8 Dividing a circle
1) Draw a circle of radius 40mm with O as centre. Let this circle to be divided in to 8 equal
divisions.
2) Draw a horizontal line and vertical line through O. These lines divide the circle into 4 equal
divisions.
3) Draw concurrent lines passing through O with included angle θ.
360 360
θ= = = 45 O
No. of Divisions 8
4) Mark the intersection points on the circumference of the circle as 1, 2, 3, etc. Thus the circle
can be divided into any number of equal divisions.

31
Example:6
☞ To divide a circle into 12 number of equal divisions.
✍ Solution:
10
9
11

8
12

7
1

6
2

M
A
5
3

G
4
PA
Fig.9 Dividing a circle (12 Divisions)

1) Draw a circle of radius 40mm with O as centre. Let this circle to be divided in to 12 equal
IP
divisions.
TH

2) Draw a horizontal line and vertical line through O. These lines divide the circle into 4 equal
divisions.
PA

3) With 1 as centre and 40mm as radius, draw arc to cut the circle in 3 and 11.
With 4 as centre and 40mm as radius, draw arc to cut the circle in 2 and 6.
With 7 as centre and 40mm as radius, draw arc to cut the circle in 5 and 9.
L

With 10 as centre and 40mm as radius, draw arc to cut the circle in 8 and 12.
A

4) Mark the intersection points and draw lines through centre by joining these points. Thus
K

circle can be divided into 12 number of equal divisions.

Example:7
☞ To draw an arc of given radius touching two given straight lines at right angles to each other.
C
✍ Solution:
1) Let AB and AC be the given lines and R be the given radius.
2) With centre A and radius equal to R, draw arcs cutting AB at P Q O
and AC at Q. R
3) With P and Q as centres and the same radius, draw arcs
intersecting each other at O.
4) With O as centre and radius equal to R, draw the required arc. A
P B
Fig. 10 Constructing an arc
Fig.10 Constructing an arc

32
Example:8
☞ To draw an arc of given radius touching two given straight lines which make any angle between them.
✍ Solution:
C C F

P Q P O Q
R O

R
E
E
A B A B
Fig.11 Constructing an arc

M
1) Let AB and AC be the given lines and R be the given radius.

A
2) Draw a line PQ parallel to and at a distance equal to R from AB.

G
3) Similarly, draw a line EF parallel to and at a distance equal to R from AC. The lines PQ and
EF intersect at O. PA
4) With O as centre and radius equal to R, draw the required arc.
IP

Example:9
TH

☞ To draw an arc of given radius touching a straight line and arc.

PA

✍ Solution:
D
L
A

E O F
R1
K

R1+R
R

Q
R

C Offset (L)
A B
Fig.12 Constructing an arc

1) Let AB be the given line and CD be the given arc of radius R1. Let R be the given radius of
the arc to be drawn. Let L be the offset distance between the line and centre of given arc.
2) Draw a line EF parallel to and at a distance equal to R from AB.
3) With Q as centre and radius (R1+R), draw an arc to cut the line EF at O.
4) With O as centre and radius R, draw the required arc.

Example:10
☞ To draw an arc of given radius touching two arcs.

33
 ✍ Solution:
F
O
E
D

R
R1+R

R2+

R2
R
A
R1
P B C Q
Offset (L)

Fig.13 Constructing an arc

1) Let AB and CD be the given arcs of radius R1 and R2 respectively. Let R be the radius of
the arc to be drawn. Let L be the offset distance between the centres of the given arcs.
2) With P as centre and radius (R1+R), draw an arc EF.
3) With Q as centre and radius (R2+R), draw an arc to the cut the arc EF at O.

M
4) With O as centre and radius R, draw the required arc.

A
G
SOLVED PROBLEMS

Example:1
PA
IP

☞ Divide a straight line of 80mm length at an angle of 30 O

into 6 equal divisions.
TH

✍ Solution: 6'
C
PA

1) Draw a line AB of length 80mm, inclined B

6
at 300 to horizontal. 5'
L

2) Draw a line AC of length 70mm, inclined 4' 5

A

at 450 to horizontal.
4
3'
K

3) From A, cut–off 6 equal divisions of length

10mm, along the line AC using a divider. 3
2' 80
Name the points as 1’,2’,3’,3’, etc. 2
4) Draw a line joining B and 6’. 1'
1
5) Draw lines through 1’,2,3’, etc., parallel 30°
to B7’. Thes lines intersect AB at 1,2,3, A
etc., thus dividing it into 6 equal parts.
Fig.14 Dividing a straight line

Example:2
☞ The angle between two straight lines is 45O. Bisect the angle.
,

34
 A
✍ Solution:
1) Draw ∠ABC with included angle 45O.
2) With B as centre and 20mm radius, draw an arc cutting
D
AB at D and BC at E.
3) With centres D and E, and 40mm radius draw arcs F
45°
intersecting each other at F.
4) Draw a line joining F and B. The line FB bisects the angle C
B E
ABC i.e. ∠FBA = ∠ FBC =½∠ABC = 22.5O.
Fig.15 Bisecting an angle
Example:3
☞ The angle between two straight lines is 120 . Bisect the angle.
O

,
✍ Solution:
1) Draw ∠ABC with included angle 120O. A F
2) With B as centre and 20mm radius, draw an arc cutting

M
AB at D and BC at E. D

A
3) With centres D and E, and 40mm radius draw arcs 120°

G
intersecting each other at F.
B E C
ABC i.e. ∠FBA = ∠ FBC =½∠ABC = 60O
PA
4) Draw a line joining F and B. The line FB bisects the angle
Fig.16 Bisecting an angle
IP
Example:4
TH

☞ Draw an arc of 30mm radius touching two given straight lines at right angle to each other.
PA

✍ Solution: C

1) Draw lines AB and AC with 90O included angle. Q O

L

2) With centre A and 30mm radius , draw arcs cutting AB at P and 0

R3
A

AC at Q.
30
K

3) With P and Q as centres and 30mm radius, draw arcs intersecting

each other at O.
A 30 P B
4) With O as centre and 30mm radius, draw the required arc.
Fig.17 Constructing an arc

Example:5
☞ Draw an arc of 10mm radius touching two given straight lines AB and AC having acute angle of 50 . O

C
✍ Solution: 10 F
1) Draw lines AB and AC with incluede angle of 50O.
2) Draw a line PQ parallel to and at a distance of 10mm from AB. P Q
0 O
3) Similarly, draw a line EF parallel to and at a distance of 10mm R1
10

50°
from AC. The lines PQ and EF intersect at O.
A E B
4) With O as centre and 10mm radius, draw the required arc.
Fig.18 Constructing an arc

35
Example:6
☞ Draw an arc of 20mm radius touching two given lines having included angle 120 O
between them.

✍ Solution: F
C 20
1) Draw lines AB and AC with incluede angle of 120O.
2) Draw a line PQ parallel to and at a distance of 20mm O Q
P
from AB.
3) Similarly, draw a line EF parallel to and at a distance of

0
R2

20
20mm from AC. The lines PQ and EF intersect at O.
4) With O as centre and 20mm radius, draw the required 120°
arc. A E B
Fig.19 Constructing an arc

Example:7
☞ Draw an arc of 30mm radius touching a given straight line AB and an arc of radius 50mm. The

M
centre of given arc is 20mm above the line AB.

A
✍ Solution:

G
PA
D
IP
R5
O R80 0
E F
TH

Q
R3
0
30

20
PA

C
A B
L

Fig.20 Constructing an arc

A

1) Draw a line AB. Mark a point Q 20mm above line AB.

K

2) Draw an arc CD with Q as centre and 50mm radius.

3) Draw a line EF parallel to and at a distance of 30mm from AB.
4) With Q as centre and 80(50+30)mm radius, draw an arc to cut the line EF at O.
5) With O as centre and 30mm radius, draw the required arc.

Example:8
☞ Draw an arc of 40mm radius touching two arcs of 20mm and 30mm at an offset distance of 60mm
between centres.

✍ Solution:

1) Draw an arc AB with P as centre and 20mm radius.

2) Mark a point Q at a distance of 60mm from P. Draw an arc CD with Q as centre and 30mm
radius.
3) With P as centre and 60(20+40)mm radius, draw an arc EF.

36
 E O
F

R7
R40

0
R60

0
D

R3
0
A R2
C Q
P B
60

Fig.21 Constructing an arc

4) With Q as centre and radius 70(30+40)mm, draw an arc to cut the arc EF at O.
5) With O as centre and 40mm radius, draw the required arc.

2.4 Construction of Polygons

M
Example:1

A
☞ Construct an equilateral triangle of side 30mm (a) with one side horizontal (b) with one side vertical

G
(c) with one side inclined at 40O to horizontal.
PA
✍ Solution:
IP

B C
TH

30
C 30
PA

B
30
30

C
L

30
A

40°
K

A B A
30 A

(a) One side horizontal (b) One side vertical (c) One side inclined at 40°

Fig.1 Constructing a triangle

1) Draw a line AB =30mm (side of triangle) as shown in fig. 1(a), 1(b) and 1(c).
2) With A as centre and 30mm as radius, draw an arc.
3) With B as centre and 30mm as radius, draw another arc to cut the previous arc at C.
4) Join AC and BC. Now ABC is the required equilateral triangle.

Example:2
☞ Construct a square of side 40mm (a) with two sides horizontal (b) with two sides equally inclined
(c) with one side inclined at 30O to horizontal.

37
✍ Solution:
Q
Q C
C
P Q

40
D C

40
P
D
P
D B
B

45° 30°
A 40 B
A A

(a) Two sides horizontal (b) Two sides equally inclined (a) One side inclined at 30°

Fig.2 Constructing a square

1) Draw a line AB = 40mm.

2) Draw lines AP and BQ perpendicular to AB.

M
3) Mark a point C on BQ such that BC = 40mm.

A
4) Similarly mark a point D on AP such that AD = 40mm.

G
5) Draw a line joining C and D.
6) Then ABCD is the required square.
PA
IP
Example:3
☞ Construct a rectangle of side 40mm x 30 mm (a) with two sides horizontal (b) with two sides equally
TH

inclined (c) with one side inclined at 30O to horizontal.

PA

✍ Solution:
Q Q
C C
L

40
30

P Q
A

30
40

D C
P
K

B D
P
30

D B

A 45° 30°
40 B
A A

(a) Two sides horizontal (b) Two sides equally inclined (a) One side inclined at 30°

Fig.3 Constructing a rectangle

1) Draw a line AB = 40mm.
2) Draw lines AP and BQ perpendicular to AB.
3) Mark a point C on BQ such that BC = 30mm.
4) Similarly mark a point D on AP such that AD = 40mm.
5) Draw a line joining C and D.
6) Then ABCD is the required square.

38
Example:4
☞ Draw a regular pentagon of side 40mm (a) with one side horizontal (b) with one side vertical
with one side inclined at 60O to horizontal.
(c)

✍ Solution:
C
C
B
D
5
D 4 B
4 5

40
3
D
E C

40
3 3
2 E
2
4 A
1 A
E 2

36°

°
36
36° 1
5
P A 40 B 1 60°

M
P P

A
(a) One side horizontal (b) One side vertical (c) one side inclined at 60°

G
Fig.4(a) Constructing a pentagon (Method – I)

1) Draw a line AB equal to 40mm.

PA
IP
2) With centre A and radius AB, draw a semi–circle BP.
3) Divide the semi–circle into 5 equal parts (same as the number of sides). Name the division
TH

points as 1,2,3,etc. starting from P.

4) Draw a line joining A with the second division point 2.
PA

5) Draw lines through the division points 3,4,etc. from A and extend the lines to convenient
length.
L

6) With B as centre and radius AB(=30mm), draw an arc cutting the line A4, produced, at C.
A

7) With C as centre and the same radius, draw an arc cutting the line A–3 produced, at D.
K

8) Draw line BC, CD and DE. Now ABCDE represents the required pentagon.

Method – II (Angle Method)

D C
C

B
D
E C
54°

B
O O
D O
°
54°

54
°
54

54° 54° A E
60°
A B
E A
(a) One side horizontal (b) One side vertical (c) one side inclined at 60°

Fig.4(b) Constructing a pentagon (Method – II)

39
1) Draw a line AB equal to 40mm.
2) With AB as base and base angles equal to 54°, draw an isosceles triangle, ABO.
3) With O as centre and radius OA, draw a circle which passes through A and B.
4) With A & B as centres, AB as radius, cut the circle at E & C. With C as centre, AB as radius,
cut the circle at D.
5) Draw lines BC, CD, DE and EA. Now ABCDE represents the required pentagon.

Example:5
☞ Draw a regular hexagon of side 25mm (a) with two sides horizontal (b) with two sides vertical (c)
with one side inclined at 45O to horizontal.

✍ Solution:

Method – I (Dividing the semi circle in to 6 equal divisions)

C D

M
C
E D

A
B
D E
6

G
5

25
F
2
3 4
5
C

E
PA 4
3
4 5
6
B
IP
1 3 A F

25
2
6 A
TH

P B F 2
A 25 1
1 45°
P
P
PA

(a) Two sides horizontal (b) Two sides vertical (c) One side inclined at 45°
Fig.5(a) Constructing an hexagon (Method – I)
L

1) Draw a line AB = 25mm.

A

2) With centre A and radius AB, draw a semi–circle BP.

K

3) Divide the semi–circle into 6 equal parts (same as the number of sides). Name the division
points as 1,2,3,etc. starting from P.
4) Draw a line joining A with the second division point 2.
5) Draw lines through the division points 3,4,etc. from A and extend the lines to convenient
length.
6) With B as centre and radius AB, draw an arc cutting the line A5, produced, at C.
7) With C as centre and the same radius, draw an arc cutting the line A–4 produced, at D.
8) With D as centre and the same radius, draw an arc cutting the line A–3 produced, at E.
9) Draw line BC, CD, DE, EF and FA. Now ABCDEF represents the required hexagon.

Method – II

1) Draw a circle with O as centre and radius = 30mm.

2) Draw diameter line AD.

40
 Radius of circle = Side of Heaxagon
D
F E
Inscribe hexagon
E C

O
A D
O

B
Circumscribed circle F
C
B
A
(a) Two sides horizontal (b) Two sides vertical

Fig.5(b) Constructing an hexagon (Method – II)

Note : This method is recommended for drawing hexagon quickly.

M
A
3) With A as centre and radius = 30mm (Radius of circle = Side of hexagon), draw arcs to cut

G
the circle at B and F.
PA
4) With D as centre and same radius, draw arcs to cut the circle at C and E.
5) Draw lines AB, BC, CD, DE, EF and FA. Now ABCDEF is the required hexagon.
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

41
 Unit – III
BASICS OF COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
3.1 Introduction
AutoCAD was developed by Autodesk Inc., U.S.A. It is the most popular PC-CAD based
system available in the market. The term ‘Auto’ refers the company Autodesk Inc., and the
term ‘CAD’ is the acronym of Computer Aided Design or Drafting. It is one of the worldwide
standard for generating various kinds of drawing. AutoCAD’s open architecture has allowed
third party developer’s to write application software by using programming language like
AutoLISP, etc. and that has significantly added to its popularity. AutoCAD has provided the
facilities for the users to customize AutoCAD to make it more efficient and therefore increases
their productivity.

M
3.2 Applications of AutoCAD

A
It is used by civil engineers in the design of buildings, dams, arches, etc.

G
It is used by mechanical engineers in the design of machine parts, assembly, automobile
components, consumer products, etc.
PA
It is used by electronics engineer in the design of PCBs.
IP
It is used by electrical engineers in the design of electrical wiring circuits.
It is used by art directors in the film industry for generating 3D models, etc.
TH

3.3 Advantages of AutoCAD

PA

Drawings can be created very easily and quickly.

Accurate and high precise drawings can be created.
L

Existing drawings can be edited and modified easily.

A

Dimensioning of drawings can be done easily.

K

Storage and retrieval of drawings are very easy.

Visualization of drawings is very easy.
Drawing office productivity is increased considerably.
The users can customize AutoCAD to suit their needs.

3.4 Windows desktop

Fig.3.1 shows the widnows desktop. It is the on-screen work area on which windows,
icons, menus, and dialog boxes appear. Window is a portion of the screen where programs
and processes can be run. We can open several windows at the same time. Icon is small image
displayed on the screen to represent an object that can be manipulated by the user. Task bar
appears at the bottom of the desktop. This contains the Start button and running programs.
You can click the taskbar buttons to switch between programs. We can also hide the taskbar,
move it to the sides or top of the desktop, and customize it in other ways.

42
 M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA

Fig.3.1 Windows desktop

3.5 Starting AutoCAD

L

AutoCAD program can be opened by the following ways :

A

1) Open a progam by standard way

K

Click Start button ➤ All Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD2010 ➤ AutoCAD2010

2) By double clicking on the AutoCAD Program shortcut icon on the Desktop
When you start AutoCAD, it displays Startup dialog box as shown in fig.3.2 [System
variable : Startup = 1; Filedia = 1]. By using this dialog box you can define the settings for
a new drawing. There are three main methods that you can use to create a new drawing. This
dialog box can also be executed by entering the command NEW in the command: prompt.

Options
Start from Scratch : Starts an empty drawing using default imperial or metric settings.
Imperial : Starts a new drawing based on the Imperial measurement system. The default
drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is 12 × 9 inches.
Metric : Starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement system. The default
drawing boundary (the drawing limits) is 429 × 297 millimeters.

43
 Fig.3.2 Startup dialog box

M
Use a Template : Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file. Template drawings

A
store all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers, dimension styles,

G
and views.

PA
Select a Template : Lists all DWT files that currently exist in the drawing template file
location, which is specified in the Options dialog box.
IP
Browse : Displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) where
you can access template files that are not available in the Select a Template list.
TH

Use a Wizard : Sets up a drawing using a step-by-step guide.

PA

Quick Setup : Displays the Quick Setup wizard, in which you can specify the units and area
for your new drawing. The Quick Setup wizard also changes settings, such as text height
and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale.
L

Advanced Setup : Displays the Advanced Setup wizard, in which you can specify the units,
A

angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area for your new drawing.
K

3.6 AutoCAD screen interface

Fig.3.3 shows the typical arrangements of elements in AutoCAD window. It includes the
following.
Drawing area: The area in which your drawings are displayed and modified. The size of
the drawing area varies, depending on the size of the AutoCAD window and on how the
panels and other elements are displayed.

Application Icon : It displays an Application Menu. We can acces the basic file handling
commands from this menu such as New, Open, Save, SaveAS, Export, Print, Close, etc.

Quick Access Toolbar : It is the toolbar located at the top left of the screen. It displays
the Save, Undo, and Redo buttons by default. You can customize the Quick Access Toolbar
to display any commands you want. To display the Menu Bar, Click the small down arrow
in the Quick Access Toolbar and select Show Menu Bar in the pull-down menu.

44
 M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig. 3.3 AutoCAD screen interface

45
 Menu bar and Pull down menu: Pull-down menus are always pulled down from the menu
bar. It contains menu items that represent AutoCAD commands.

InfoCentre : The InfoCenter gives you the opportunity to type in keywords that will enable
AutoCAD to search both online and offline resources and provide you with a list of related
help topics.

Ribbon and tabs : Across the top of the screen is the Ribbon, a collection of different tabs.

Panels : Each tab consists of different Panels. For example, the HOME tab consists of eight
panels: Draw, Modify, Layers, Annotation, Block, Properties, Utilities, and Clipboard. Each
tab offers a different set of buttons, menus, and galleries. Each button executes an
AutoCAD command while clicking on it.

Tool pallets: Tool palettes are tabbed areas in the AutoCAD window. You can place blocks
and hatches that you use often on a tool palette. When you need to add a block or a hatch
to a drawing, drag it from the tool palette onto your drawing.
AutoCAD cursor: It is in the form of cross hair consisting of two lines that intersect. The

M
cursor changes to a small box called pick box when the selection of object is required.

A
Mini-toolbars A mini-toolbar is a toolbar that appears on-screen to help you do a task.

G
You can select an option from a drop-down list or click a button on the mini-toolbar to
PA
complete a task. Mini-toolbars are very convenient. They save you the trouble of going to
a different tab to complete a task.
IP

Sortcut menus : Similar to mini-toolbars are the shortcut menus, you get when you
TH

rightclick. Right-click just about anywhere and you get a shortcut menu of some kind.
Command area: It is a text area reserved for keyboard input, prompts, and messages.
PA

Status bar: It is displayed at the bottom of the AutoCAD window. It shows information
about the current cursor position (coordinate display) and the ON/OFF status of drawing
L

aids such as SNAP, GRID, ORTHO, etc.

A

3.7 Execution of commands

K

AutoCAD provides the folllowing methods to execute commands.

1) Panels 2) Pull down menu 3) Keyboard

1) Panels
Panels are used for selecting AutoCAD commands easily and conveniently. Each Panel
contains a group of icons representing different AutoCAD commands. Required AutoCAD
command can be executed by clicking on the corresponding icon in the respective Panel.

Example: LINE command can be executed by clicking on the Line icon in the Draw Panel.

2) Pull down menu

AutoCAD commands can be easily selected from the pull down menu. Each pull down menu
contains a list of items representing different AutoCAD commands. Required AutoCAD command
can be executed by clicking on the corresponding item in the respective pull down menu.

Example: LINE command can be executed by clicking on the Line item in Draw pull down menu.

46
3) Keyboard
To enter a command by using the keyboard, type the full command name on the
command line and press ENTER or SPACEBAR, or right-click your pointing device. Some
commands also have abbreviated names called command aliases and are defined in the
acad.pgp file.
Notes:
When you enter commands on the command line, AutoCAD displays either a set of options
or a dialog box. To choose an option, enter the letters CAPITALIZED in the options in the
brackets. You can enter uppercase or lowercase letters.

If you want to repeat a command that you have just used, press ENTER or SPACEBAR,
or right-click your pointing device at the Command prompt.

To cancel a command in progress, press ESC.

3.8 Coordinate systems

To specify a point in a plane, we will take two mutually perpendicular lines as reference.

M
The horizontal line is called as X-axis and the vertical line is called as Y-axis. The intersection

A
of these two lines is known as origin. AutoCAD uses the folllowing coordinate systems which

G
can be used to locate a point in X-Y plane.

1) Absolute coordinate system PA

In absolute coordinate system, the points are located with reference to the origin. Use
IP
an absolute coordinate when you know the precise X and Y values of the point coordinate. For
TH

example, the coordinate 3,4 specifies a point 3 units along the X axis and 4 units along the Y
axis from the origin.
PA

2) Relative coordinate system

Relative coordinate values are based on the last point entered. Use a relative coordinate
L

when you know the position of a point in relation to the previous point. To specify a relative
A

coordinate, precede the coordinate with an @ sign. For example, the coordinate @3,4 specifies
K

a point 3 units along the X axis and 4 units along the Y axis from the last point specified.

Another method of entering a relative coordinate is by moving the cursor to specify a

direction and then entering a distance directly. This method is called direct distance entry.

3) Polar coordinate system

To enter a polar coordinate, enter a distance and an angle separated by an angle bracket
(<). For example, to specify a point that is at a distance of 1 unit from the previous point and
at an angle of 45 degrees, enter @1<45.

By default, angles increase in the counterclockwise direction and decrease in the

clockwise direction. To move clockwise, enter a negative value for the angle. For example,
entering 1<315 is the same as entering 1<-45. Polar coordinates are either absolute
(measured from the origin) or relative to the previous point. To specify a relative coordinate,
precede the coordinate with an @ sign.

47
Example:
80

P5 P4

60
100

P3

M 50
53
°
A
P1 P2

G
50
PA
Fig.3.4 Coordinate systems
IP
The various methods of specifying the points shown in the fig.3.4 are listed below.
TH

Coordinate method
Point
PA

Absolute Relative Polar

P1 0,0 0,0 0,0
P2 50,0 @50,0 @50<0
L

P3 80,40 @30,40 @50<53

A

P4 80,100 @0,60 @60<90

K

P5 0,100 @-80,0 @80<180

P1 0,0 @0,-100 @100<270

3.9 Drafting settings

1) Setting limits
Command: LIMITS Menu: Format  Drawing limits
This command sets and controls the limits of the drawing boundaries and grid display in
the current Model or layout tab.

Example: To set the drawing limits to 210 x 297 (A4) units.

Command: LIMITS
Reset Model space limits:
Specify lower left corner or [ON/OFF]: 0,0
Specify upper right corner: 210,297

48
2) Setting units
Command: UNITS, UN Menu: Format  Units
This displays Drawing Units Dialog box which is used to define units and angle format.

Options
Length: Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current units.
• Type: Sets the current format for units of measure. The values include Architectural,
Decimal, Engineering, Fractional, and Scientific. The Engineering and Architectural
formats produce feet-and-inches displays and assume that each drawing unit represents
one inch. The other formats can represent any real-world unit.
• Precision: Sets the number of decimal places or fractional size displayed for linear
measurements.

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.3.5 Drawing Units dialog box

Angle: Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle display.
• Type: Sets the current angle format.
• Precision: Sets the precision for the current angle display.
• Clockwise: Calculates positive angles in the clockwise direction. The default direction for
positive angles is counterclockwise.

Drag and Drop Scale: Controls the unit of measurement for blocks that are dragged into
the current drawing.

Sample Output: Displays an example of the current settings for units and angles.

Direction: Displays the Direction Control dialog box which defines the angle for 0 degrees
and specifies the direction angles are measured.

49
3.10 Creating objects using draw commands
1) Creating lines
Command: LINE, L Panel: Home  Draw 

This command is used to create straight line segments. AutoCAD draws a line segment
and continues to prompt for points. You can draw a continuing series of line segments, but
each line segment is a separate object. Press ENTER to end the command.

Options
Close: Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first line segment, which forms
a closed loop of line segments. You can use Close after you have drawn a series of two
or more segments.

Undo: Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence. Entering u more than once
backtracks through line segments in the order you created them.

Example:1. To draw a line from point (2,3) to point (5,8)

Command: LINE

M
(5,8)
Specify first point: 2,3

A
Specify next point or [Undo]: 5,8

G
Specify next point or [Undo]:
PA (2,3)

Example:2. To draw an equilateral triangle with one of its end points at (2,3) having side of 4 units.
IP
Command: LINE
TH

Specify first point: 3,3

Specify next point or [Undo]: @4,0 (2,3)
4
PA

Specify next point or [Undo]: @4<120

Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: C
L

2) Creating arcs
A

Command: ARC, A Panel: Home  Draw 

K

This command is used to create arcs. The various methods for creating arcs are
explained below with examples.

By specifying three points

Command: ARC (3,5)
Specify start point of arc or [Center]: 2,3
(3,4)
Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: 3,4
Specify end point of arc: 3,5 (2,3)

By specifying Start, Centre, End

Command: ARC (2,5)

Specify start point of arc or [Center]: 2,3

Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: C (2,4)

Specify center point of arc: 2,4

(2,3)
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: 2,5

50
 By specifying Start, Centre, Angle
Command: ARC (2,5)
Specify start point of arc or [Center]: 2,3

°
90
Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: C
Specify center point of arc: 2,5
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: A
Specify included angle: 90 (2,3)

By specifying Start, Centre, Length

Command: ARC (3,4)
2.5
Specify start point of arc or [Center]: 2,3
Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: C (2,3)
Specify center point of arc: 3,4
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]: L
Specify length of chord: 2.5

M
By specifying Start, End, Radius

A
Command: ARC

G
(2,3) (5,3)
Specify start point of arc or [Center]: 2,3
Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: E
Specify end point of arc: 5,3
PA R2
IP
Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]: R
Specify radius of arc: 2
TH

Note: If you press ENTER without specifying a point, AutoCAD uses the endpoint of the last
PA

drawn line or arc and immediately prompts you to specify the endpoint of the new arc. This
creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc, or polyline.
L

3) Creating circles
A

Command: CIRCLE, C Panel: Home  Draw 

K

This command is used to create circles. The various methods used to create circles are
explained below with examples.

By specifying Centre, Radius

Command: CIRCLE R2

Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: 2,3
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: 2 (2,3)

By specifying Centre, Diamter

Command: CIRCLE Ø4

Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: 2,3
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <2.0000>: D (2,3)
Specify diameter of circle <4.0000>: 4

51
 By specifying three points on the circumference
Command: CIRCLE
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: 3P (1,3) (2,3)

Specify first point on circle: 2,3

Specify second point on circle: 1,2 (1,2)
Specify third point on circle: 1,3

By specifying two points on the diamter

Command: CIRCLE (2,6)
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: 2P
Specify first end point of circle's diameter: 2,3
Specify second end point of circle's diameter: 2,6 (2,3)

5) Tangent, Tangent, Radius (TTR) method

C1

M
1 C2 C2

A
L2

G
L1 L1

a)
a) Circle tangential to two lines
b)PA c)
IP
Command: CIRCLE
TH

Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: T

Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select L1
PA

Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select L2

Specify radius of circle <current>: Enter suitable value
L

b) Circle tangential to a line and a circle

A

Command: CIRCLE
K

Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: T

Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select L1
Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select C1
Specify radius of circle <current>: Enter suitable value

c) Circle tangential to two circles

Command: CIRCLE
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: T
Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select C1
Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select C2
Specify radius of circle <current>: Enter suitable value

4) Creating rectangles
Command: RECTANG, REC Panel: Home  Draw 

This command is used to create rectangles by specifying the two opposite corner points.
52
Options
First Corner: Specifies a corner point of the rectangle.
Dimensions: Creates a rectangle using length and width values.
Chamfer: Sets the chamfer distances for the rectangle.
Elevation: Specifies the elevation of the rectangle.
Fillet: Specifies the fillet radius of the rectangle.
Thickness: Specifies the thickness of the rectangle.
Width: Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn.

Example:
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point or
[Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: 2,3

3
Specify other corner point or [Dimensions]: @6,3

M
(2,3)

A
6

G
5) Creating ellipse
Command: ELLIPSE, EL PA
Panel: Home  Draw 

This command is used to create ellipse or elliptical arc. The various methods used to
IP

create ellipse are explained below with example.

TH

By specifying both end points of an axis and other axis distance

PA

Command: ELLIPSE
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center]: 2,3 (2,3) (6,3)
1.5

Specify other endpoint of axis: 6,3

L

Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: 1.5

A
K

By specifying both end points of an axis and rotation angle

Command: ELLIPSE
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center]: 2,3
Specify other endpoint of axis: 6,3
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: R
Specify rotation around major axis: Enter a value

(2,3) (6,3) (2,3) (6,3) (2,3) (6,3)

0° 45° 80°

53
 By specifying center, one end point of any one axis and other axis distance
Command: ELLIPSE
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center]: C (4,3)
Specify center of ellipse: 4,3 (2,3)

1.5
Specify endpoint of axis: 2,3
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: 1.5

By specifying center, one end point of any one axis and angle of rotation
Command: ELLIPSE
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center]: C
Specify center of ellipse: 4,3
Specify endpoint of axis: 2,3
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: R
Specify rotation around major axis: Enter a value

M
A
(2,3) (4,3) (2,3) (4,3) (2,3) (4,3)

G
PA
0° 45° 80°
IP
TH

6) Creating donuts
Command: DONUT, DO Panel: Home  Draw 
PA

This command is used to create filled circles and rings. To create a donut, you specify
its inside and outside diameters and its center. You can continue creating multiple copies with
L

the same diameter by specifying different center points. To create solid-filled circles, specify
A

an inside diameter of 0.
K

2
1

(2,3)

Inside diameter = 0
Example:
Command: DONUT
Specify inside diameter of donut <0.5000>: 1
Specify outside diameter of donut <2.0000>: 2
Specify center of donut or <exit>: 2,3
Specify center of donut or <exit>:

54
7) Creating polygons
Command: POLYGON, POL Panel: Home  Draw 

This command is used to create equilateral closed polylines with between 3 and 1,024 equal-
length sides. Creating polygons is a simple way to draw squares, equilateral triangles, octagons,
and so on. The various methods of creating polygons are explained below with example.

Edge method
To draw a regular hexagon with base side of 3 units.

Command: POLYGON
Enter number of sides <6>: 6
Specify center of polygon or [Edge]: E
Specify first endpoint of edge: 2,3
Specify second endpoint of edge: 5,3
(2,3) (5,3)

Inscribed circle method

M
Command: POLYGON

A
Enter number of sides <6>: 5

G
(2,3)
Specify center of polygon or [Edge]: 2,3

Specify radius of circle: 3

PA
Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle]: I R3
IP
TH

Circumscribed circle method

Command: POLYGON
PA

Enter number of sides <6>: 4

(2,3)
Specify center of polygon or [Edge]: 2,3
Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle]: C R2
L

Specify radius of circle: 2

A
K

8) Creating points
Command: POINT, PO Panel: Home  Draw 

This command is used to create point objects. Points can act as nodes to which you can
snap objects.

Command: POINT
Current point modes: PDMODE=3 PDSIZE=-2.0000
Specify a point: Specify a location

Changing the point style

Command: DDPTYPE Menu: Format  Point style
This command displays a dialog box which shows the current point style and size.
Change the point style by selecting an icon.

55
 Fig.3.6 Point style dialog box
Options
Point Display Images: Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point

M
style is stored in the PDMODE system variable.

A
Point Size: Sets the point display size. AutoCAD stores the point display size in the

G
PDSIZE system variable.

PA
Set Size Relative to Screen: Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen size.

Set Size in Absolute Units: Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify
IP
under Point Size.
TH

9) Creating polylines
Panel: Home  Draw 
PA

Command: PLINE, PL

This command is used to create two dimensional polylines.

Command: PLINE
L

Specify start point: Specify a point (1)

A

Current line-width is <current>

K

Specify next point or [Arc/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: Specify a point (2)

or enter an option
Options
Arc: Adds arc segments to the polyline. It provides various options for drawing drawing
polyarcs.
Close: Draws a line segment from the current position to the starting point of the polyline,
creating a closed polyline.
Halfwidth: Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of
its edges.
Length: Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, AutoCAD draws the new line segment tangent
to that arc segment.
Undo:Removes the most recent line segment added to the polyline.
Width: Specifies the width of the next line segment.

56
10) SKETCH
Command: SKETCH
This command is used to create a series of freehand line segments. SKETCH is useful
for entering map outlines, signatures, or other freehand drawings. Sketched lines are not
added to the drawing until they are recorded.
Command: SKETCH
Record increment <current>:Specify a distance or press Enter

Options
Pen: Raises and lowers the sketching pen. The pen must be raised before you can select
menu items with the pointing device.
Exit: Records and reports the number of temporary lines sketched and ends the
command.
Quit: Discards all temporary lines sketched since the start of SKETCH or the last use of
the Record option, and ends the command.

M
Record: Records temporary lines as permanent and does not change the pen's position.

A
Erase: Erases any portion of a temporary line and raises the pen if it is down.

G
Connect: Lowers the pen to continue a sketch sequence from the endpoint of the last
sketched line or last Erase. PA
. (Period): Lowers the pen, draws a straight line from the endpoint of the last sketched
IP
line to the pen's current location, and returns the pen to the up position.
TH

3.11 Creating text

1) Creating single line text
PA

Command: TEXT Panel: Home  Annotation 

This command is used to create single line text. Each text line is an independent object
L
A

that you can relocate, reformat, or otherwise modify. When you create single-line text, you
assign a text style and set alignment on the command line.
K

Command: TEXT
Current text style: current Current text height: current
Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: Specify a point
Specify height <current>: Enter a value
Specify rotation angle of text <current>: Specify an angle
Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command

TL TC TR

ML
CAST IRON MR

BL MC BC BR

57
Options
Justify: Controls justification of the text. The various justification of text are as follows:
• Align: Specifies both text height and text orientation by designating the endpoints of the
baseline.
• Fit: Specifies that text fits within an area and at an orientation defined with two points and
a height. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
• Center: Aligns text from the horizontal center of the baseline, which you specify with a
point.
• Middle: Aligns text at the horizontal center of the baseline and the vertical center of the
height you specify. Middle-aligned text does not rest on the baseline.
• Right: Right-justifies the text at the baseline, which you specify with a point.
• TL (Top Left): Left-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for
horizontally oriented text only.
• TC (Top Center): Centers text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available for
horizontally oriented text only.

M
• TR (Top Right): Right-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the text. Available

A
for horizontally oriented text only.
• ML (Middle Left): Left-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text.

G
PA
Available for horizontally oriented text only.
• MC (Middle Center): Centers the text both horizontally and vertically at the middle of the
IP
text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
• MR (Middle Right): Right-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of the text.
TH

Available for horizontally oriented text only.

• BL (Bottom Left): Left-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for
PA

horizontally oriented text only.

• BC (Bottom Center): Centers text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for
L

horizontally oriented text only.

A

• BR (Bottom Right): Right-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline. Available for
K

horizontally oriented text only.

Style: Specifies the text style, which determines the appearance of the text characters. Text
you create uses the current text style.
Enter style name or [?] <current>: Enter a text style name or enter ? to list all text styles

2) Creating multi-line text

Command: MTEXT, T Panel: Home  Annotation 

This command is used to create multiline text. MTEXT creates paragraphs that fit within
a boundary that defines the width of the paragraph and its location in the drawing. Each
multiline text (mtext) object is a single object, regardless of the number of lines it contains.
Command: MTEXT
Specify first corner: Pick a point
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style /Width]:
Pick another point or enter an option

58
After you specify the point for the opposite corner, the Multiline Text Editor is displayed.

The Multiline Text Editor includes a Text Formatting toolbar and a shortcut menu.

M
Text Formatting Toolbar

A
Controls the text style for the multiline text object and the character formatting for

G
selected text. The various options in the toolbar are as follows.
PA
Style: Applies a text style to the multiline text object.
Font: Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of selected text.
IP
Text Height: Sets the character height in drawing units for new text or changes the
TH

height of selected text.

Bold: Turns on and off bold formatting for new or selected text.
PA

Italic: Turns on and off italic formatting for new or selected text.
Underline: Turns on and off underlining for new or selected text.
Undo: Undoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor, including changes to either text
L
A

content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL+Z.

Redo: Redoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor, including changes to either text
K

content or text formatting. You can also use CTRL+Y.

Stack: Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the selected text contains stack
characters. Also, unstacks text if stacked text is selected. When the stack characters,
carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign (#), are used, the text to the left of the
stack character is stacked on top of the text to the right.
Text Color: Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of selected text.
Close: Closes the Multiline Text Editor and saves any changes that you made. You can
also click in the drawing outside the editor to save changes and exit the editor. To close
the Multiline Text Editor without saving changes, press ESC.

Multiline Text Editor Shortcut Menu

Provides standard editing options and options specific to multiline text (mtext). Right-
click in the Multiline Text Editor to display the shortcut menu.

59
 Indents and Tabs: Displays the Indents and Tabs dialog box , where you can set
indentation for the paragraph and also set up tab stops. Set
Mtext Width: Displays the Set Mtext Width dialog box, in which you can specify a width
for the multiline text object in drawing units.
Justification: Sets justification and alignment for the multiline text object. Top Left is
the default setting.
Find and Replace: Displays the Replace dialog box.
Select All: Selects all the text in the multiline text object.
Change Case: Changes the case of selected text. Options are Uppercase or Lowercase.
AutoCAPS: Converts all newly typed and imported text to uppercase.
Remove Formatting: Removes bold, italic, or underline formatting from the selected text.
Combine Paragraphs: Combines selected paragraphs into a single paragraph and
replaces each paragraph return with a space.
Stack/Unstack: Stacks text if any of the stack characters are contained in the selected
text. Unstacks text if stacked text is selected.

M
Properties: Displays the Stack Properties dialog box.

A
Symbol: Inserts a listed symbol or nonbreaking space at the cursor position.

G
Import Text: Displays the Select File dialog box. Select any file that is in ASCII or RTF
format.
PA
Help: Displays the MTEXT topic in the Help system.
IP
3.12 Creating multilines
TH

Command: MLINE, ML Menu: Draw  Multiline

This command is used to create multiple parallel lines.
PA

Command: MLINE
Current settings: Justification = current, Scale = current, Style = current
L

Specify start point or [Justification/Scale/STyle]: Specify a point or enter an option

A

Options
K

Start Point: Specifies the next vertex of the multiline.

Justification: Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify.
Scale: Controls the overall width of the multiline.
Style: Specifies a style to use for the multiline. The multiline style can be changed by
using MLSTYLE command.

3.13 Creating splines

Command: SPLINE Panel: Home  Draw 

This command is used to create Non-Uniform Raional B-Splines (NURBS).

Command: SPLINE
Specify first point or [Object]: Specify a point or enter an option

Options
First Point: Creates a spline using points you specify.

60
 Close: Closes the spline curve by defining the last point as coincident with the first and
making it tangent to the joint.
Fit Tolerance: Changes the tolerance for fitting of the current spline curve.
Start Tangent: Defines the tangency for the first and last points of the spline curve.
Object: Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent splines
and deletes the polylines.

3.14 Drawing with precision

1) Object Snap
Command: OSNAP, OS Menu: Tools  Drafting settings
Shortcut menu: Press SHIFT while right-clicking in the drawing area and choose Osnap Settings.

Using object snaps is a quick way to locate an exact position on an object without having
to know the coordinate or draw construction lines. When more than one option is selected,
AutoCAD applies the selected snap modes to return a point closest to the center of the aperture

M
box. Press TAB to cycle through the options.

A
Options

G
Object Snap On: Turns running object snaps on and off. The object snaps selected
PA
under Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on.
Object Snap Tracking On: Turns object snap tracking on and off.
IP
Object Snap Modes: Specifies the running object snap modes.
TH

Select All: Turns on all object snap modes.

Clear All: Turns off all object snap modes.
PA

Options: Displays the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box

Object Snap Modes

L

Endpoint (END): Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc, line, multiline,
A

polyline segment, spline, or region.

K

Midpoint (MID): Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, multiline,
polyline segment, region, solid, spline, or xline.
Center (CEN): Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
Node (NOD): Snaps to a point object, dimension definition point, or dimension text
origin.
Quadrant (QUA): Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc.
Intersection (INT): Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc,
line, multiline, polyline, ray, region, spline, or xline.
Extension (EXT): Causes a temporary extension line to display when you pass the
cursor over the endpoint of objects, so you can draw objects to and from points on the
extension line.
Insertion (INS): Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, a shape, or text.
Perpendicular (PER): Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical
arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region, solid, spline, or xline.

61
 M
A
G
PA
Fig.3.7 Drafting setting dialog box
IP
Tangent (TAN): Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, or spline.
Nearest (NEA): Snaps to the nearest point on an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line,
TH

multiline, point, polyline, ray, spline, or xline.

Apparent Intersection (APPINT): Snaps to the apparent intersection of two objects
PA

that do not intersect in 3D space but may appear to intersect in the current view.
Parallel (PAR): Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever AutoCAD prompts
L

you for the second point of a vector.

A

From (FRO): Snaps to a point relative to a given point

K

2) Polar tracking
When you are creating or modifying objects, you can use polar tracking to display
temporary alignment paths defined by the polar angles you specify. You can use polar tracking
to track along polar angle increments of 90, 60, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15, 10, and 5 degrees, or
you can specify other angles. PolarSnap restricts cursor movement to increments of a polar
distance you specify. For example, if you specify a length of 4 units, the cursor snaps from the
first point specified to lengths of 0, 4, 8, 12, 16, and so on. As you move your cursor, a tooltip
indicates the nearest PolarSnap increment. To restrict point entry to polar distances, both polar
tracking and Snap mode must be on.

Options
Polar Tracking On: Turns polar tracking on and off.
Polar Angle Settings: Sets the angles used with polar tracking.
• Increment Angle: Sets the polar increment angle used to display polar tracking alignment paths.

62
 • Additional Angles: Makes any additional angles in the list available for polar tracking.
• New: Adds up to 10 additional polar tracking alignment angles.
• Delete: Deletes selected additional angles.
Object Snap Tracking Settings: Sets options for object snap tracking.
• Track Orthogonally Only : Displays only orthogonal object snap tracking paths for
acquired object snap points when object snap tracking is on.
• Track Using All Polar Angle Settings: Permits the cursor to track along any polar angle
tracking path for acquired osnap points when object snap tracking is on while specifying
points.
Polar Angle Measurement: Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are
measured.
• Absolute: Bases polar tracking angles on the current user coordinate system (UCS).
• Relative to Last Segment: Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn.

3.15 Drawing Aids

M
1) Snap

A
Command: SNAP, SN

G
This command is used to restrict the cursor movement to specified intervals. You can
PA
turn the snap on and off with the SNAP button on the status bar.

Options
IP
Snap Spacing: Activates Snap mode with the value you specify.
TH

On: Activates Snap mode using the current resolution, rotation, and style of the snap grid.
Off: Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings.
PA

Aspect: Specifies different spacing in the X and Y directions.

Rotate: Sets the origin and rotation of the snap grid.
Style: Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric.
L
A

• Standard: Displays a rectangular grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
• Spacing: Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid.
K

• Aspect: Specifies the horizontal and vertical spacing of the snap grid separately.
• Isometric: Sets an isometric grid, in which the grid points are initially at 30-degree and
150-degree angles. Isometric snap can be rotated but cannot have different Aspect
values.
Type: Specifies the snap type.
• Polar: Sets the snap to polar tracking angles that are set in the POLARANG system variable.
• Grid: Sets the snap to grid.

2) Grid
Command: GRID, GR
This command displays a dot grid in the current viewport. The grid is for visual reference
only. It is not plotted, and it is not part of the drawing. You can turn the grid display on and
off with the Grid button on the status bar.

63
Options
Grid Spacing (X): Sets the grid to the specified value.
On: Turns on the grid using the current spacing.
Off: Turns off the grid.
Snap: Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by the SNAP command.
Aspect: Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions.

3) ORTHO
Command: ORTHO Status bar: ORTHO
You can use Ortho mode to restrict the cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical
axis. By imposing orthogonal constraints, you can draw more quickly. For example, you can
create a series of perpendicular lines by turning on Ortho mode before you start.

4) Function Keys
Function keys are used to execte an action very quickly. The uses of function keys in
AutoCAD are listed below.

M
A
Function key Use

G
F1 Help
F2
F3
PA
Switches between text window and graphics window
OSNAP on or off
IP
F4 TABMODE on or off.
F5 ISOPLANE on or off.
TH

F6 COORDS on or off.
F7 GRIDMODE on or off.
PA

F8 ORTHOMODE on or off.
F9 SNAPMODE on or off.
L

F10 Polar Tracking on or off.

A

F11 Object Snap Tracking on or off.

K

3.16 Editing and Modify commands

1) Object selection methods

AutoCAD requires that objects be selected in order to be processed. The Select Objects
prompt occurs after many commands. A small box, called the object selection target, replaces
the crosshairs on the graphics cursor. The selected objects are displayed as dashed.

You can select objects individually with the pointing device, by drawing a selection window
around them, by entering coordinates, or by using one of the selection methods listed below.
Window: Selects all objects completely inside a rectangle defined by two points.
Specifying the corners from left to right creates a window selection. (Specifying the
corners from right to left creates a crossing selection.)
Last: Selects the most recently created visible object.

64
 Crossing: Selects objects within and crossing an area defined by two points. A crossing
selection is displayed as dashed.
[Note: Specifying the corners from right to left creates a crossing selection. Specifying
the corners from left to right creates a window selection.]
Box: Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified by two points. If the
rectangle's points are specified from right to left, Box is equivalent to Crossing.
Otherwise, Box is equivalent to Window.
All: Selects all objects on thawed layers.
Fence: Selects all objects crossing a selection fence.
WPolygon: Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by points. The polygon
can be any shape but cannot cross or touch itself.
CPolygon: Selects objects within and crossing a polygon defined by specifying points.
Group: Selects all objects within a specified group.
Add: Switches to the Add method: selected objects can be added to the selection set
by using any of the object selection methods. Auto and Add are the default methods.

M
Remove: Switches to the Remove method: objects can be removed from the current

A
selection set using any object selection method. An alternative to Remove mode is to

G
hold down SHIFT while selecting single objects or use the Automatic option.

PA
Multiple: Specifies multiple points without highlighting the objects, thus speeding up
the selection process for complex objects.
IP
Previous: Selects the most recent selection set.
Undo: Cancels the selection of the object most recently added to the selection set.
TH

Auto: Switches to automatic selection: pointing to an object selects the object.

Single: Switches to the Single method: selects the first object or set of objects
PA

designated rather than continuing to prompt for further selections.

Example:
L

P1 P2
A
K

P2 P1
Window selection Crossing selection
2) Removing objects
Command: ERASE, E Panel: Home  Modify 

This command is used to remove the selected objects from the drawing. Any object selection
method can be used. After selecting the objects, press Enter to remove the selected objects.

3) Restoring the erased objects

Command: OOPS
This command is used to restore the objects erased by the last erase command.

65
4) Reverses the effect of action
Command: UNDO Toolbar: Quick Access 

This command reverses the effect of previous commands. To reverse more than one
action at a time, click the arrow next to the Undo button on the Quick Access toolbar and select
the last in the sequence of actions you want to undo.
Options
Number: Undoes the specified number of preceding operations. The effect is the same as
entering u multiple times.
Auto: Groups the actions of a single command, making them reversible by a single U
command.
Control: Limits or turns off UNDO.
• All: Turns on the full UNDO command.
• None: Turns off the U and UNDO commands and discards any UNDO command
information saved earlier in the editing session.
• One: Limits UNDO to a single operation.

M
Begin, End: Groups a sequence of actions into a set. After you enter the Begin option, all

A
subsequent actions become part of this set until you use the End option.

G
Mark, Back: Mark places a mark in the undo information. Back undoes all the work done
back to this mark. PA
IP
5) Reverses the effect of UNDO
Command: REDO Toolbar: Quick Access 
TH

REDO reverses the effects of a single UNDO or U command. REDO must immediately
PA

follow the U or UNDO command.

6) Move objects
L

You can move objects without changing their orientation or size. By using coordinates
A

and object snaps, you can move objects with precision.

K

Command: MOVE, M Panel: Home  Modify 

This command is used to move objects to a specified distance in a specified direction.

Example:

B B

Before move After move

Command: MOVE
Select objects: Select the circle
Select objects: 1 found
Specify base point or displacement: Select point A
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:Select point B

66
7) OFFSET
Command: OFFSET, O Panel: Home  Modify 

OFFSET creates a new object at a specified distance from an existing object or through
a specified point. It is used to creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves

Options
Offset Distance: Creates an object at a specified distance from an existing object.
Through: Creates an object passing through a specified point.

Example:
5

Before After Before After Before After

M
Command: OFFSET

A
Specify offset distance or [Through] <5.0000>: 5

G
Select object to offset or <exit>:Seelct the line
PA
Specify point on side to offset:Click on the right side of line
Select object to offset or <exit>:
IP
TH

8) ROTATE
Command: ROTATE, RO Panel: Home  Modify 
PA

This command is used to rotate objects around a specified point. To determine the angle
of rotation, you enter an angle value or specify a second point.
L

Optiions
A

Rotation Angle: Determines how far an object rotates around the base point.
K

Reference: Specifies the absolute current rotation angle and desired new rotation angle.

Example:
30°

A
Before After
Command: ROTATE
Current positive angle in UCS: ANGDIR=counterclockwise ANGBASE=0
Select objects: Select the rectangle
Select objects:
Specify base point:Pick at A
Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: 30

67
9) SCALE
Command: SCALE, SC Panel: Home  Modify 

This command is used to enlarge or reduces selected objects proportionally in the X, Y,

and Z directions

Options
Scale Factor: Multiplies the dimensions of the selected objects by the specified scale.
A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the objects. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks
the objects.
Reference: Scales the selected objects based on a reference length and a specified
new length.

Example:

M
A

A
Before scale After scale

G
Command: SCALE
Select objects: Select the objects
Select objects:
PA
IP
Specify base point: Pick at A
TH

Specify scale factor or [Reference]: 2

PA

10) FILLET
Command: FILLET, F Panel: Home  Modify 
L

FILLET rounds the edges of two arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays,
A

splines, or xlines with an arc of a specified radius. FILLET also rounds the edges of 3D solids.
K

Options
First Object: Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or the edge of a
3D solid to fillet.
Edge: Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press ENTER.
Chain: Toggles from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent edges.
• Edge Chain: Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select a single edge.
• Edge: Switches to a single edge selection mode.
Radius: Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Polyline: Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments meet.
Trim: Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.
• Trim: Trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.
• No Trim:Does not trim the selected edges.
Multiple: Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects.

68
Example:
B R5

Before After Before After Polyline fillet

Command: FILLET
Current settings: Mode = TRIM, Radius = 0.5000
Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: R
Specify fillet radius <0.5000>: 5
Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]:Pick at A
Select second object: Pick at B

11) CHAMFER
Command: CHAMFER, CHA Panel: Home  Modify 

M
Chamfer is used to create a beveled edge on a corner of two intersecting objects.

A
CHAMFER can also be used to bevel all corners of a polyline.

G
Options PA
First Line: Specifies the first of two edges required to define a two-dimensional chamfer,
IP
or the edge of a three-dimensional solid to chamfer.
TH

by one line or arc segment, AutoCAD deletes the segment and replaces it
Edge: Selects an individual edge to chamfer.
PA

Loop: Switches to Edge Loop mode.

• Edge Loop: Selects all edges on the base surface.
• Edge: Switches to Edge mode.
L

Polyline: Chamfers an entire 2D polyline.

A

Distance: Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.
K

Angle: Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an angle
for the second line.
Trim: Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the chamfer line endpoints.
Method: Controls whether AutoCAD uses two distances or a distance and an angle to create
the chamfer.
Multiple: Bevels the edges of more than one set of objects.

Example:

Before After Polyline chamfer

69
 Command: CHAMFER
(TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = 0.5000, Dist2 = 0.5000
Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]: D
Specify first chamfer distance <30.0000>: 10
Specify second chamfer distance <10.0000>: 10
Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]:Pick at A
Select second line: Pick at B

12) TRIM
Command: TRIM, TR Panel: Home  Modify 
This command is used to trim objects at a cutting edge defined by other objects. Objects
that can be trimmed include arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, open 2D and 3D polylines, rays,
splines, and xlines. Pressing SHIFT while selecting an object extends it to the nearest boundary
rather than trimming it.
Options

M
Object to Trim: Specifies the object to trim. AutoCAD repeats the prompt for the object

A
to trim so that you can trim multiple objects. Pressing ENTER ends the command.

G
Project: Specifies the projection AutoCAD uses when trimming objects.
• None: Specifies no projection.
PA
• UCS: Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current UCS.
• View: Specifies projection along the current view direction.
IP

Edge: Determines whether an object is trimmed at another object's implied edge or only
TH

to an object that intersects it in 3D space.

• Extend: Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to intersect an object in 3D space.
PA

• No Extend: Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting edge that intersects it
in 3D space.
L

Undo: Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM.

A

Example:
K

1 3
4
Before trim After trim Before trim After trim

Command: TRIM
Current settings: Projection=UCS, Edge=None
Select cutting edges ...
Select objects:Select the rectangle
Select objects:
Select object to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]:Pick at 1
Select object to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]:Pick at 2
Select object to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]:Pick at 3
Select object to trim or shift-select to extend or [Project/Edge/Undo]:Pick at 4

70
13) EXTEND
Command: EXTEND, EX Panel: Home  Modify 
This command is used to extend an object to meet another object. The options
available in EXTEND command are same as the TRIM command. Pressing SHIFT while selecting
an object trims it rather than extending it.

Example:
2
1 3

Before extend After extend Before extend After extend & trim

Command: EXTEND
Current settings: Projection=UCS, Edge=None
Select boundary edges ...

M
Select objects: Select the rectangle

A
Select objects:

G
Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Pick at 1

PA
Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Pick at 2 Select
object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Pick at 3 Select object to
IP
extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Pick at 4 Select object to extend
or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
TH

14) BREAK
PA

Command: BREAK, BR Panel: Home  Modify 

This command is used to break the selected object between two points
L
A

Options
K

Second Break Point: Specifies the second point for AutoCAD to use to break the object.
First Point: Overrides the original first point with the new point that you specify.

Example:

A B

Before break After break

Command: BREAK
Select object: Select the line
Specify second break point or [First point]: F
Specify first break point: Pick at A
Specify second break point: Pick at B

71
15) ARRAY
Command: ARRAY, AR Panel: Home  Modify 

This command is used to create multiple copies of objects in a pattern. You can create
copies of objects in a rectangular or polar (circular) pattern. For rectangular arrays, you control
the number of rows and columns and the distance between each. For polar arrays, you control
the number of copies of the object and whether the copies are rotated. To create many
regularly spaced objects, arraying is faster than copying.

This command displays Array dialog box. You can create rectangular or polar arrays by
choosing the appropriate option

Creating rectangular array

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.3.8 Array dialog box (Rectangular)

Options:
Rows: Specifies the number of rows in the array.
Columns: Specifies the number of columns in the array.
Row Offset: Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. To add rows downward,
specify a negative value. To specify row spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick
Both Offsets button or the Pick Row Offset button.
Column Offset: Specifies the distance (in units) between columns.
Angle of Array: Specifies the angle of rotation.
Pick Both Offsets: Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing
device to set the row and column spacing by specifying two diagonal corners of a rectangle.
Pick Row Offset: Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the
pointing device to specify the distance between rows.

72
 Pick Column Offset: Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the
pointing device to specify the distance between columns.
Pick Angle of Array: Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can specify the
angle of rotation by entering a value or using the pointing device to specify two points.

Example:
10

10
Before array After array

M
A
Creating polar array

G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.3.9 Array dialog box (Polar)

Options
Center Point: Specifies the center point of the polar array. Enter coordinate values for
X and Y, or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the location.
Pick Center Point: Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the
pointing device to specify the center point in the AutoCAD drawing area.
Method: Sets the method used to position objects.
Total Number of Items: Sets the number of objects that appear in the resultant array.
The default value is 4.
73
 Angle to Fill: Sets the size of the array by defining the included angle between the base
points of the first and last elements in the array. A positive value specifies
counterclockwise rotation. A negative value specifies clockwise rotation. The default
value is 360. A value of 0 is not permitted.
Angle Between Items: Sets the included angle between the base points of the arrayed
objects and the center of the array. Enter a positive value. The default direction value is 90.
Pick Angle to Fill: Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can define the
included angle between the base points of the first and last elements in the array.
Pick Angle Between Items: Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
define the included angle between the base points of the arrayed objects and the center
of the array.
Rotate Items as Copied: Rotates the items in the array, as shown in the preview area.
More/Less: Turns the display of additional options in the Array dialog box on and off.
When you choose More, additional options are displayed, and the name of this button
changes to Less.

M
Object Base Point: Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected

A
objects that will remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the

G
objects are arrayed.

PA
Set to Object's Default: Uses the default base point of the object to position the
arrayed object.
IP
Base Point: Sets a new X and Y base point coordinate..
Select Objects: Specifies the objects used to construct the array. You can select objects
TH

before or after the Array dialog box is displayed. To select objects when the Array dialog
box is displayed, choose Select Objects. The dialog box temporarily closes. When you
PA

finish selecting objects, press ENTER. The Array dialog box is redisplayed, and the
number of objects selected is shown below the Select Objects button.
L

Preview Area: Shows a preview image of the array based on the current settings in
A

the dialog box. The preview image is dynamically updated when you move to another
K

field after changing a setting.

Preview: Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing.
Choose Modify to return to the Array dialog box to make changes.

Example:

Before array After array

74
16) MIRROR
Command: MIRROR, MI Panel: Home  Modify 
This command is used to create a mirror image copy of objects.

Example:
Mirror line
B

FLANGE FLANGE FLANGE

A
Before mirror After mirror
Command: MIRROR
Select objects: ALL
Select objects:
Specify first point of mirror line: Pick at A

M
Specify second point of mirror line: Pick at B
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: N

A
Note: In Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: prompt press ‘Y’ for deleting the original

G
objects and placing the mirrored image.

17) EXPLODE
PA
IP
Command: EXPLODE, X Panel: Home  Modify 
TH

This command is used to break a compound object into its component objects. A
compound object comprises more than one AutoCAD object. A block, rectangle (polylines) are
PA

examples of compound objects.

18) REGION
L

Command: REGION, REG Panel: Home  Modify 

A
K

This command is used to convert an object that encloses an area into a region object.
Regions are two-dimensional enclosed areas you create from objects that form closed loops.

19) STRETCH
Command: STRETCH, S Panel: Home  Modify 

This command is used to stretch an object. You can resize objects to make them longer
or shorter in only one direction or to make them proportionally larger or smaller.

Example:
Crossing window

Before stretch After stretch

75
 Command: STRETCH
Select objects: Select the object using crossing-window
Specify base point or displacement: Specify a base point
Specify second point of displacement: Specify a displacement point

20) LENGTHEN
Command: LENGTHEN, LEN Menu: Modify  Lengthen
This command is used to changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs.

Options
Object Selection: Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the
object.
Delta: Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the
endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Delta also changes the angle of an arc by
a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest to the selection point.
A positive value extends the object; a negative value trims it.

M
Delta Length: Changes the length of the object by the specified increment.

A
Angle: Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle.

G
Percent: Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length.

PA
Total: Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length from
the fixed endpoint.
IP
Total Length: Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is
closest to the selection point.
TH

Angle: Sets the included angle of the selected arc.

Dynamic: Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected
PA

object by dragging one of its endpoints.

Example:
L

3.0000 6.0000
A
K

Before lengthen After lengthen

Command: LENGTHEN
Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: DE
Enter delta length or [Angle] <2.0000>: 3
Select an object to change or [Undo]:Select the object
Select an object to change or [Undo]:

21) DIVIDE
Command: DIVIDE, DIV Menu: Draw  Point  Divide
This command is used to divide an object in to a number of segments of equal length
without actually breaking it. It places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length
or perimeter of an object.

76
Example:

Before divide After divide

Command: DIVIDE
Select object to divide: Select the line
Enter the number of segments or [Block]: 4

22) MEASURE
Command: MEASURE, ME Menu: Draw  Point  Measure
This command is used to place point objects or blocks at measured intervals on an
object. The last segment of a measured object may be shorter than the interval you specify.

3.17 Layer
Command: LAYER, LA Panel: Home  Layers 

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.3.10 Layer Properties Manager

This command displays the Layer Properties Manager. This dialog box makes a layer
current, adds new layers, deletes layers, and renames layers. You can assign properties to
layers, turn layers on and off, freeze and thaw layers globally or by viewport, lock and unlock
layers, set plot styles for layers, and turn plotting on and off for layers. You can filter the layer
names displayed in the Layer Properties Manager, and you can save and restore layer states
and properties settings.

77
3.18 Changing properties of objects
Command: PROPERTIES, PR Tool bar: Quick Access 

This command displays the Properties

pallette. The Properties palette lists the
current settings for properties of the selected
object or set of objects. You can modify any
property that can be changed by specifying a
new value.
When more than one object is selected,
the Properties palette displays only
those properties common to all objects
in the selection set.
When no objects are selected, the
Properties palette displays only the
general properties of the current layer,

M
the name of the plot style table

A
attached to the layer, the view

G
properties, and information about the
UCS. PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.3.11 Properties tool pallette

1) Changing linetype scale

Command: LTSCALE
Thic command is used to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a drawing.
Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to regenerate.

Example:
Command: LTSCALE
Enter new linetype scale factor <1.0000>: 2
Regenerating layout.

78
 ltscale = 1.0000

ltscale = 2.0000

ltscale = 0.5000

ltscale = 0.2500
2) Changing linetype
Command: LINETYPE, LT Menu: Format  Linetype

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L

Fig.3.12 Linetype Manager

A

This command displays the Linetype Manager. Using this dialog box you can load, set
K

and modify the linetype.

3) Matching properties
Command: MATCHPROP, PAINTER Tool bar: Quick Access 

You can copy some or all properties of one object to other objects using Match
Properties. The types of properties that can be copied include, but are not limited to, color,
layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, plot style, and thickness.
Example:
Command: MATCHPROP
Select source object: Select the source object
Current active settings: Color Layer Ltype Ltscale Lineweight Thickness
PlotStyle Text Dim Hatch Polyline Viewport
Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Select the destination object
Select destination object(s) or [Settings]:

79
3.19 Editing with grips
Grips are small, solid-filled squares that appear at strategic points on objects selected with
a pointing device. You can drag these grips to stretch, move, rotate, scale, or mirror objects quickly.

To use grips, select a grip to act as the base point for the action. Then select one of the
grip modes. You can cycle through these modes by pressing ENTER or SPACEBAR. You also
can use shortcut keys or right-click to see all of the modes and options.

You can use multiple grips as the base grips to keep the shape of the object intact
between the selected grips. Hold down SHIFT as you select the grips.

M
A
G
PA
IP

Fig.3.13 Grip location of various objects

TH

Stretch with Grips

PA

You can stretch an object by moving selected grips to new locations. Grips on text, block
references, midpoints of lines, centers of circles, and point objects move the object rather than
stretching it. This is an excellent method for moving block references and adjusting dimensions.
L
A

Move with Grips

K

You can move objects by the grip selected. Selected objects are highlighted and are
moved the direction and distance of the next point location you specify.

Rotate with Grips

You can rotate selected objects around a base point by dragging and specifying a point
location. Alternatively, you can enter an angle value. This is an excellent method for rotating
block references.

Scale with Grips

You can scale selected objects relative to a base point. Increase the size of an object by
dragging outward from the base grip and specifying a point location, or decrease the size by
dragging inward. Alternatively, you can enter a value for relative scaling.

Mirror with Grips

You can mirror selected objects across a temporary mirror line. Turning Ortho on helps
you specify a vertical or horizontal mirror line.
80
3.20 Editing polylines
Command: PEDIT, PE Panel: Home  Modify 

By using this command you can edit polylines by closing and opening them and by
moving, adding, or deleting individual vertices. You can straighten the polyline between any
two vertices and toggle the linetype so that a dash appears before and after each vertex. You
can set a uniform width for the entire polyline or control the width of each segment. You can
also create a linear approximation of a spline from a polyline.

Options
Multiple: Enables selection for more than one object
Close: Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment with
the first.
Join: Adds lines, arcs, or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the curve
fitting from a curve-fit polyline. For an object to join the polyline, their endpoints must
touch.

M
Width: Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline.

A
Edit Vertex: Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen and

G
performs different editing operations.
PA
Fit: Creates a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each pair of vertices. The curve
passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses any tangent direction you specify.
IP
Spline: Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a
spline-fit polyline. The curve passes through the first and last control points unless the
TH

original polyline was closed.

PA

Decurve: Removes extra vertices inserted by an arc-fit or spline-fit polyline and

straightens all segments of the polyline.
Ltype Gen: Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the
L

polyline.
A

Undo: Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session
K

3.21 Editing text

Command: DDEDIT Panel: Home  Text 

This command is used to edit text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature
control frames. After seelcting the feature, relevant dialog box is displayed for editing the
feature. DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press ENTER to end the command.

3.22 Editing multilines

Command: MLEDIT Menu: Modify  Object  Multiline
This command displays Multiline Edit Tools dialog box.

You can edit a multiline by adding and deleting vertices and controlling the display of
corner joints. You can make multilines intersect in various ways. You can also edit multiline
styles to change the properties of individual line elements or the end caps and background fill
of future multilines.

81
 Fig.3.14 Multiline Edit Tools dialog box
With the help of the dialog box you can create and modify multiline patterns. The dialog
box displays sample images in four columns. The first column governs multilines that cross,

M
the second governs multilines that form a tee, the third governs corner joints and vertices,

A
and the fourth governs multilines to be cut or joined. You can click any of the image samples

G
to display a brief description in the lower-left corner of the dialog box.

3.23 Basic dimensioning PA

Dimensioning is the process of indicating the sizes and other descriptions on a drawing using
IP
lines, figures, letters, symbols, and notes. The dimensioning contains the following information.
TH

1) Linear dimensioning
Command: DIMLIN Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 
PA

Linear dimensions can be horizontal, vertical, or aligned.

Options
L

First Extension Line Origin: Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line
A

after you specify the origin point of the first.

K

Dimension Line Location: Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and
determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location,
AutoCAD draws the dimension.
Mtext: Displays the Multiline Text Editor, which you can use to edit the dimension text.
Text: Customizes the dimension text on the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Angle: Changes the angle of the dimension text.
• Mtext, Text, Angle : These text editing and formatting options are identical in all
dimension commands.
Horizontal: Creates horizontal linear dimensions.
Vertical: Creates vertical linear dimensions.
Rotated: Creates rotated linear dimensions.
Object Selection: Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second
extension lines after you select an object.

82
Example : 1. Horizontal dimensioning
Command: DIMLINEAR 10.0000 C

Specify first extension line origin: Pick at A

A B
Specify second extension line origin: Pick at B
Specify dimension line location or
[Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]: H
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Pick at C
Dimension text = 10.0000

Example : 2. Vertical dimensioning

B
Command: DIMLINEAR
Specify first extension line origin: Pick at A
Specify second extension line origin: Pick at B
Non-associative dimension created.

10.0000
Specify dimension line location or

M
[Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]: V

A
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Pick at C

G
C
Dimension text = 10.0000

Example : 3. Rotated dimensioning

PA A
IP
Command: DIMLINEAR C
00
TH

5.00
Specify first extension line origin or <select object>:Pick at A
Specify second extension line origin: Pick at B A B
PA

Specify dimension line location or

[Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]: R
Specify angle of dimension line <0>: 15
L
A

Specify dimension line location or

K

[Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]: Pick at C
Dimension text = 5.0000

2) Aligned dimensioning
Command: DIMALIGNED Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 

Example:
Command: DIMALIGNED C
Specify first extension line origin or
5.

A
00
0

<select object>:Pick at A
Specify second extension line origin: Pick at B B
Specify dimension line location or
[Mtext/Text/Angle]: Pick at C
Dimension text = 5.0000

83
3) Baseline dimensioning
Command: DIMBASELINE Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 

DIMBASELINE creates a series of related dimensions measured from the same

baseline. AutoCAD uses a baseline increment value to offset each new dimension line and to
avoid overlaying the previous dimension line. The baseline increment value is specified in
Baseline Spacing on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMDLI system variable. Baseline
dimensioning is also called parallel dimensioning.

Example:

E E

D D

A B A B

M
2.0
20 2.0 2.0 2.0
C

A
C
4.0
40

G
6.0
60
Baseline dimensioning PA Continue dimensioning
IP
Command: DIMLINEAR
Specify first extension line origin or <select object>:Pick at A
TH

Specify second extension line origin: Pick at B

Non-associative dimension created.
PA

Specify dimension line location or

[Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]: Pick at C
L

Dimension text = 2.0

A

Command: DIMBASELINE
K

Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Pick at D

Dimension text = 4.0
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Pick at E
Dimension text = 6.0

4) Continue dimensioning
Command: DIMCONTINUE Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 

DIMCONTINUE draws a series of related dimensions, such as several shorter

dimensions that add up to the total measurement. Continued dimensioning is also known as
chain dimensioning.
When you create linear continued dimensions, the first extension line is suppressed and the
placement of text and arrowheads might include a leader line. These appear as overrides for the
continued dimension (the DIMSE1 system variable is on, and the DIMTMOVE system variable is 1).
The command sequence for DIMCONTINUE is same as DIMBASELINE.

84
5) Angular dimensioning
Command: DIMANG Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 

DIMNAG is used to create angular dimension between two non parallel lines.

Options
Arc Selection: Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three-point
angular dimension. The center of the arc is the angle vertex. The arc endpoints become
the origin points of the extension lines.
Circle Selection: Uses the selection point (1) as the origin of the first extension line.
The center of the circle is the angle vertex.
Line Selection: Defines the angle using two lines.
Three-Point Specification: Creates a dimension based on three points you specify.
Dimension Arc Line Location: Specifies the placement of the dimension line and
determines the direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location,
DIMANGULAR ends.

M
Example:

A
C

G
B °
135
4 5°

A
PA
IP
TH
PA

45°

°
1 35
L
A
K

Command: DIMANGULAR
Select arc, circle, line, or <specify vertex>:Pick at A
Select second line: Pick at B
Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Pick at C
Dimension text = 45

6) Diameter dimensioning
Command: DIMDIA Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 

DIMDIAMETER draws different types of diameter dimensions depending on the size of

the circle or arc, the options set for the dimension style, and the position of the cursor. The
dimension style controls center marks and centerlines. AutoCAD does not draw a center mark
or a centerline when a dimension line is drawn inside the arc or circle. AutoCAD stores the
setting for center marks and centerlines in the DIMCEN system variable.

85
 AutoCAD measures the diameter and displays the text with a diameter symbol(φ) in
front of it. The position of the cursor determines the location of the dimension line. As you
move the cursor, the dimension moves around or inside the circle or arc.

(Note : To include φ symbol, use %%C before the value, i.e. %%C10 = φ10)

Example:
Command:DIMDIAMETER Ø10
Select arc or circle: Selct the circle A
Dimension text = 10
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Pick at A Ø3

7) Radius dimensioning
Command: DIMRAD Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 

A radial dimension consists of a radius dimension line with an arrowhead at the arc or
circle end. AutoCAD draws a center mark if the DIMCEN system variable is not set to 0.

M
Example:

A
R10
Command:DIMRADIUS
A

G
Select arc or circle: Selct the circle
Dimension text = 10 PA
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Pick at A R10
IP

8) Dimensioning with leader

TH

Command: QLEADER Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 

PA

Use QLEADER to quickly create leaders and leader Dimension. The leader line is
associated with the multiline text object, so when the text object is relocated, the leader line
stretches accordingly.
L
A

Example:
K

4 HOLES Ø4 AT PCØ40

Command: QLEADER
Specify first leader point, or [Settings] <Settings>: Pick the circle
Specify next point: Pick outside the circle
Specify next point:
Specify text width <0.0000>:
Enter first line of Dimension text <Mtext>: 4 HOLES %%C4 AT PC%%C40

86
9) Dimensioning editing

Command: DIMEDIT Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 

DIMEDIT affects dimension text and extension lines on one or more dimension
objects. The Home, New, and Rotate options affect dimension text. The Oblique option controls
the angle of extension lines.

Options
Home: Moves rotated dimension text back to its default position.
New : Changes dimension text using the Multiline Text Editor.
Rotate: Rotates dimension text.
Oblique:Adjusts the oblique angle of the extension lines for linear dimensions.

10) Changing dimensioning styles

A dimension style is a saved set of dimension settings that determines the appearance
of the dimension. By creating dimension styles, you can set all relevant dimensioning system
variables and control the layout and appearance of any dimension.

M
Dimension styles can have multiple secondary styles with varying settings. For example,

A
within a dimension style, you can create a secondary style for radius dimensions and another

G
secondary style for angular dimensions. AutoCAD uses the appropriate secondary style for the
PA
type of dimension you create. If there are no differences in settings for a dimension type, the
primary dimension-style settings are used.
IP

Command: DDIM, D Panel: Annotate  Dimensions 

TH

This command displays Dimension Style Manager which creates new styles, sets the
PA

current style. A dimension style is a saved set of dimension settings that determines the
appearance of the dimension. By creating dimension styles, you can set all relevant
dimensioning system variables and control the layout and appearance of any dimension.
L
A

Dimension styles can have multiple secondary styles with varying settings. For example,
K

within a dimension style, you can create a secondary style for radius dimensions and another
secondary style for angular dimensions. AutoCAD uses the appropriate secondary style for the
type of dimension you create. If there are no differences in settings for a dimension type, the
primary dimension-style settings are used.

Options
Current Dimstyle: Displays the current dimension style. AutoCAD assigns styles to all
dimensions. If you do not change the current style,
Styles: Displays all dimension styles in the drawing.
List: Provides options that control which dimension styles are displayed.
• All Styles: Displays all dimension styles.
• Styles in Use: Displays only the dimension styles that are referenced by dimensions in
the drawing.
Don't List Styles in Xrefs: Suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced
drawings under Styles.
87
 M
A
Fig.3.15 Dimension style manager

G
Set Current: Sets the style selected under Styles to current.
PA
New: Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, in which you can define new
dimension styles.
IP
Modify: Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box, in which you can modify
TH

dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New Dimension Style
dialog box.
PA

Override: Displays the Override Current Style dialog box, in which you can set temporary
overrides to dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New
Dimension Style dialog box.
L
A

Compare: Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog box, which compares the
K

properties of two dimension styles or lists all the properties of one style.

New Dimension Style Dialog box

By using this dialog box, you can set properties for dimension styles. After you choose
Continue in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box
is displayed. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box. The dialog box
initially displays the properties of the dimension style that you selected to start the new style
in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box.

Choosing either Modify or Override in the Dimension Style Manager displays the Modify
Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog box. The content of these dialog boxes
is identical to the New Dimension Style dialog box, although you are modifying or overriding
an existing dimension style rather than creating a new one.

88
 M
A
G
PA
Fig.3.16 New dimension style dialog box
IP

The New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog box includes the following tabs.
TH

Lines and Arrows Tab: ets the format and properties for dimension lines, extension
lines, arrowheads, and center marks.
PA

Text Tab: Sets the format, placement, and alignment of dimension text.
Fit Tab: Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the
L

dimension line.
A

Primary Units Tab: Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets
K

prefixes and suffixes for dimension text.

Alternate Units Tab: Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements
and sets their format and precision.
Tolerances Tab: Controls the display and format of dimension text tolerances.

3.24 BLOCK
Block is a generic term for one or more objects that are combined to create a single object.
Command: BLOCK, BMAKE, B Panel : Home  Block 

This command displays Block Definition Dialog box which defines and names a block.

Options
Name: Names the block.
Base Point: Specifies an insertion base point for the block.
Objects : Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or delete
the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you create the block.
89
 M
A
G
PA
IP
Fig.3.17 Block Definition dialog box
TH

Preview Icon: Determines whether to save a preview icon with the block definition and
specifies the source of the icon.
PA

Drag and Drop Units: Specifies the units to which the block is scaled when it is dragged
into a drawing using DesignCenter or i-drop.
L

Description: Specifies the text description associated with the block.

A

Hyperlink: Opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box, which you can use to associate a
K

hyperlink with the block definition.

3.25 INSERT

Command: INSERT, I Panel: Insert  Blocks 

This command is used to place a drawing or named block into the current drawing. It
displays Insert Dialog box.

Options
Name: Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a block.
Insertion Point: Specifies the insertion point for the block.
Scale: Specifies the scale for the inserted block.
Rotation: Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS.
Explode: Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block.

90
 Fig.3.18 Insert dialog box
3.26 Hatching

M
Hatching is necessary to differentiate the cut area from the uncut portions. Many drafting

A
applications use hatching to fill an area with a pattern. The pattern is used to differentiate

G
components of a project or to signify the material composing an object.

1) Boundary Hatch
PA
IP
Command: BHATCH, BH, H Panel: Home  Draw 
TH

This command displays Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box which is used to define the
boundary, pattern type, pattern properties, and attributes for hatch and gradient fill objects.
PA

The Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box includes the following tabs:
(a) Hatch (b) Advanced (c) Gradient
L

Hatch tab
A

It defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.

K

Options
Type: Sets the pattern type.
• Predefined: Specifies a predefined AutoCAD pattern.
• User Defined: Creates a pattern of lines based on the current linetype in your drawing.
You can control the angle and spacing of the lines in your user-defined pattern.
• Custom: Specifies a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT file that you have added
to the AutoCAD search path.
Pattern: Lists the available predefined patterns. The six most recently used predefined
patterns appear at the top of the list. The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette
dialog box, in which you can view preview images for all predefined patterns at once to help
you make a selection.
Swatch: Displays a preview of the selected pattern. You can click the swatch to display the
Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box.

91
 M
A
G
PA
Fig.3.19 Boundary Hatch dialog box
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.3.20 Hatch patterns

92
 Custom Pattern: Lists the available custom patterns. The six most recently used custom
patterns appear at the top of the list.
Angle: Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current UCS.
Scale: Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern.
Relative to Paper Space: Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Using
this option, you can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your
layout. This option is available only from a layout.
Spacing: Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern.
ISO Pen Width: Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width.

Advanced tab
Defines how AutoCAD creates and hatches or fills boundaries.

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.3.21 Boundary Hatch dialog box - Advanced

Options
Island Detection Style: Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the
outermost boundary. If no internal boundaries exist, specifying an island detection style
has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it's often best to use the
Normal style.
• Normal: Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If AutoCAD encounters an
internal intersection, it turns off hatching or filling until it encounters another intersection.
• Outer: Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. AutoCAD turns hatching or filling
off if it encounters an internal intersection.
• Ignore: Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through them.

93
 Object Type: Specifies whether to retain boundaries as objects, and the object type that
AutoCAD applies to those objects.
• Retain Boundaries: Adds the temporary boundary objects to the drawing.
• Object Type: Controls the type of the new boundary object.
Boundary Set: Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary
from a specified point.
• Current Viewport : Defines the boundary set from everything visible in the current
viewport.
• Existing Set: Defines the boundary set from the objects that you selected with New.
• New: Prompts you to select the objects that define the boundary set.
Island Detection Method: Specifies whether to include objects within the outermost
boundary as boundary objects. These internal objects are known as islands.
• Flood:Includes islands as boundary objects.
• Ray Casting: Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest object and then traces
the boundary in a counterclockwise direction, thus excluding islands as boundary objects.

M
Gradient tab

A
Defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be applied.

G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.3.22 Boundary Hatch dialog box - Gradient

Options
One Color: Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades and lighter
tints of one color.
Two Color: Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors.

94
 Color Swatch: Specifies the color for the gradient fill. Click the Browse button [...] to
display the Select Color dialog box, where you can select an AutoCAD Index color, true
color, or color book color.
Shade and Tint Slider: Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade
(the selected color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color.
Centered: Specifies a gradient configuration that is symmetrical.
Angle: Specifies the angle of the gradient fill.
Gradient Patterns: Displays nine fixed patterns for gradient fills.

Additional options
Pick Points: Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen. The
objects must form an enclosed area. How AutoCAD detects objects using this option
depends on which island detection method is selected on the Advanced tab. When you
select Pick Points, the dialog box closes temporarily, and AutoCAD displays a prompt.
• Select internal point: Specify a point within the area to be hatched or filled
• Select internal point: Specify a point, enter u or undo to undo the last selection, or

M
press ENTER to end point specification and return to the dialog box

A
G
While specifying points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any time to display
PA
a shortcut menu. You can undo the last or all point specifications, change the selection method,
change the island detection style, or preview the hatch or gradient fill.
IP

Select Objects: Specifies objects for hatching or filling. The dialog box closes
TH

temporarily, and AutoCAD prompts you to select objects.

Remove Islands: Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that
PA

AutoCAD detects as islands when you use the Pick Points option. You cannot remove the
outer boundary.
L

View Selections: Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently
A

defined boundaries with the hatch or fill settings that you last previewed. This option is
K

unavailable when no boundary has been defined.

Inherit Properties: Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill
properties of one object. After selecting the associative hatch or fill object whose
properties you want the hatch or fill to inherit, you can right-click in the drawing area
and use the shortcut menu to toggle between the Select Objects and Pick Points options
to create boundaries.
Double: For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees
to the original lines, creating a crosshatch.
Composition: Controls whether the hatch or gradient fill is associative or
nonassociative.
Associative: Creates a hatch or fill that is updated when you modify its boundaries.
Nonassociative: Creates a hatch or fill that is independent of its boundaries.
Preview: Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined
boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings.

95
3.27 View group commands
1) Zoom
Command: ZOOM, Z Panel: View  Navigate 

This command is used to increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current
viewport. You can change the magnification of a view by zooming in and out. ZOOM does not
change the absolute size of objects in the drawing; it changes only the magnification of the view.
Options
All: Zooms to display the entire drawing in the current viewport.
Center: Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and a magnification value
or height. A smaller value for the height increases the magnification. A larger value
decreases the magnification.
Dynamic: Zooms to display the generated portion of the drawing with a view box.
Extents: Zooms to display the drawing extents and results in the largest possible display
of all the objects.

M
Previous: Zooms to display the previous view. You can restore up to 10 previous views.

A
Scale: Zooms the display at a specified scale factor.
Window: Zooms to display an area specified by two opposite corners of a window

G
Real Time: Using the pointing device, zooms interactively to a logical extent. Press ESC
PA
or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display the shortcut menu.
IP
2) Redraw
TH

Command: REDRAW, R Menu: View  Redraw

This command is used to refreshe the display in the current viewport. AutoCAD redraws the
PA

current viewport, removing marker blips and display artifacts (stray pixels) left by editing commands.

3) Regen
L

Command: REGEN, RE Menu: View  Regen

A

This command is used to regenerate the entire drawing from the current viewport.
K

REGEN regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for all objects
in the current viewport. It also reindexes the drawing database for optimum display and object
selection performance.

4) Pan
Command: PAN, P Panel : View  Navigate 

You can shift the location of your view by using PAN or by using the window scroll bars.
With the Realtime option, you pan dynamically by moving your pointing device. Like panning
with a camera, PAN does not change the location or magnification of objects on your drawing;
it changes only the view. The cursor changes to a hand cursor.

By holding down the pick button on the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current
location relative to the viewport coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in the same
direction as the cursor. To stop panning at any time, press ENTER or ESC.

96
5) View
A view is a portion of a drawing that is displayed in a viewport. You can save and restore
views by name for convenient access. Views are saved separately in model space and paper space.

Command: VIEW, V Panel: View  Views  Named Views

This command displays View dialog box.

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH

Fig.3.23 View dialog box

PA

Options
Named Views Tap
L

Current View: Displays the name of the current view.

A

View Names: Lists the named views in the current drawing.

K

Set Current : Restores the selected view.

New: Displays the New View dialog box.
Details: Displays the View Details dialog box.
Rename (Shortcut Menu Only): Renames the selected view.
Delete (Shortcut Menu Only): Deletes a named view.

Orthographic and Isometric Views Tab

Current View: Displays the name of the current view.
View Names: Lists the orthographic and isometric views.
Set Current: Restores the selected orthographic view. iew.
Relative To: Specifies the base coordinate system for defining the orthographic view.
Restore Orthographic UCS with View: Restores the associated UCS when you make
an orthographic view current.

97
3.28 Inquiry tools

1) Measuring distance
Command: DIST, DI Panel : Home  Utilities 

This command is used to measure the distance and angle between two points.

Example:
10

A B
Command: DIST
Specify first point: Pick at A
Specify second point: Pick at B
Distance = 10.0000, Angle in XY Plane = 0, Angle from XY Plane = 0
Delta X = 10.0000, Delta Y = 0.0000, Delta Z = 0.0000

M
2) Calculating area

A
Command: AREA, AA Panel : Home  Utilities 

G
This command is used to calculate the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas.

Options
PA
IP
First Corner Point: Calculates the area and perimeter you define by specifying points.
TH

Object: Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. You can calculate the
area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and solids.
PA

Add: Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you continue
to define areas. The Add option calculates the individual areas and perimeters of defined
areas and objects as well as the total area of all defined areas and objects.
L

Subtract: Turns on Subtract mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you
A

subtract specified areas.

K

3) Calculator
Command: CAL
CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or integer
expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the object snap functions
such as CEN, END, and INS.

Evaluating real and integer expressions

The real and integer expressions consists of real or integer numbers combined with
numeric operators such as +, -, *, /,^(exponent), etc.

Example:
Command: CAL
>> Expression: (6.5+(2^4))
22.5

98
Evaluating vector expression
A vector expression consists point vectors, numbers and functions that are combined with
vector operators.

Example:
Command: CAL
>> Expression: [5,6,3]+[2,-5,4]
(7.0 1.0 7.0)

3.29 Creating multiple view ports

Command: VPORTS Panel: View  Model Viewports 

This command displays View ports dialog box which contains a list of standard view
port configurations and configures model view ports.

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

Fig.3.24 View ports – Four Equal

Options
New Name : Specifies a name for the new model view port configuration you are creating.
If you do not enter a name, the view port configuration you create is applied but not saved.
If a view port configuration is not saved, it cannot be used in a layout.
Standard View ports: Lists and sets the standard view port configurations, including
CURRENT, which is the current configuration.
Preview: Displays a preview of the view port configuration you select and the default views
assigned to each individual view port in the configuration.
Apply To: Applies the model view port configuration to the entire display or to the current
view port.
• Display: Applies the view port configuration to the entire Model tab display. Display is the
default setting.
• Current View port: Applies the view port configuration to the current view port only.

99
 Setup: Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D, the new view port
configuration is initially created with the current view in all of the view ports. When you
select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is applied to the view ports in the
configuration.
Change View To : Replaces the view in the selected view port with the view you select
from the list. You can choose a named view, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can
select from the list of standard views. Use the Preview area to see the choices.

3.30 Switching to layout tab

In AutoCAD, it is more convenient to use the Paper Space (Layout tab) for creating two-
dimensional drawing rather than the Model Space. Each layout in AutoCAD represents a drawing
sheet. We can directly take printout of the drawing from the layout in a standard drawing sheet.
The procedure for switching to layout tab is as follows :

1) Right click on Layout1

M
2) Select

A
3) Click

G
4) Selct the suitable printer from the list PA
IP
5) Selct the suitable paper size from the list
TH

6) Click
PA

Now AutoCAD automatically sets the drawing limits to the selected paper size. There is
L

no need to set the limits. We can directly create the 2D drawing in the paper space using
A

AutoCAD commands.
K

3.31 Printing / plotting drawings

Command: PLOT, PRINT, Ctrl+P Panel: Output  Plot 

This command displays the Plot dialog box.

To print the drawing:

Select a Printer / plotter.
Select paper size, plot area, plot scale, orientation and other options.
Click Preview… to view the drawing before printing. Press Esc to close the Preview
window.
Click OK to take print out of the drawing.

100
 M
A
G
PA
IP
TH

Fig.3.25 Plot dialog box / Page Setup dialog box

PA
L
A
K

101
 FOR MECHANICAL ENGINEERING &
ALLIED COURSES

Unit – IV
ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS USING CAD
4.1 Basics of orthographic projection
If straight lines are drawn from various points on the contour of an object to meet a plane,
the object is said to be projected on the plane. The figure formed by joining the points at which
these lines meet the plane, is called a projection of that object. The lines drawn from the object
to the plane are called projectors.

V.P.

M
Plane

A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA

FRONT
Object
L

Fig.4.1 Orthographic projection

A
K

When the projector are parallel to each other and also perpendicular to the plane, the
projection is called an orthographic projection.

4.2 Planes of projection

The picture plane used for obtaining orthographic projection are called reference plane or
principal planes of projection. They meet each other at right angles.

The plane in front of the observer is the vertical plane of projection or the frontal plane.
It is usually denoted by the letters V.P.

The other plane which is horizontal but perpendicular to the V.P. is the horizontal plane.
It is denoted by the letters H.P.
A plane perpendicular to both V.P. and H.P. is known as auxiliary vertical plane and is
denoted by A.V.P.

The line of intersection of V.P. and H.P. is known as the reference line and is usually
denoted by the letters X–Y.

102
 2nd Quadrant
(Above HP &
behind VP)

1st Quadrant
90°
(Above HP &
in front of VP)

3rd Quadrant 90°

(Below HP &
behind VP) 4th Quadrant
(below HP &
in front of VP)

M
Fig.4.2 Planes of projection Fig.4.3 Four quadrants

A
4.3 Four quadrants

G
If the planes of projection are extended beyond the line of intersection, they form four
PA
quadrants. The object may be placed in any one of these quadrants. In order to obtain the
projections, the observer views the object from in front of V.P. and above H.P. The position of the
IP
object relative to the places is described as above or below the H.P and in front he of behind the V.P.
TH

4.4 Systems of orthographic projection

PA

FRONT VIEW
L
A
K

X Y
TOP VIEW

TOP VIEW
X Y

FRONT VIEW

(a) First angle projection (b) Third angle projection

Fig.4.4 Systems of orthographic projection

Orthographic views can be obtained by the following two methods.

a) First angle projection b) Third angle projection

103
The comparison of these two methods of orthographic projection is shown in the following table.
First angle projection Third angle projection
1) The object is assumed to be kept in first The object is assumed to be kept in third
quadrant, i.e. in front of VP and above HP. quadrant, i.e. behind VP and below HP.
2) The object lies between the observer and the The plane of projection lies between the
plane of projection. observer and the object.
3) The plane of projection is assumed to be The plane of projection is assumed to be
non–transparent. transparent.
4) In this method, the top view comes below In this method, the top view comes above
the front view. the front view.
5) The left side view of the object is drawn to The left side view of the object is drawn to
the right of the front view. the left of front view.

4.5 Symbols of orthographic projection

M
A
G
(a) First angle projection PA (b) Third angle projection
IP
Fig.4.5 Symbols of orthographic projection
For every drawing it is essential to indicate the method of projection adopted. This is done
TH

by means of a symbolic figure drawn within the title block on the drawing sheet. The symbols
recommended by BIS for first angle projection and third angle projection are shown in the fig.4.5.
PA

The symbol represents the views of a frustum of cone with its axis horizontal.

4.7 Obtaining views in first angle projection

L
A

1) Front view or elevation

K

V.P.

FRONT VIEW

Fig.6 Obtaining front view

, When the object is viewed from the front, the projection of object obtained on the vertical
plane (V.P) is known as the front view or elevation. This view may represent the length and
height of the object.
,,

104
2) Top view or plan

V.P.
FRONT VIEW

X Y

TOP VIEW

H.P.

M
(a) (b) (c)

A
Fig.7 Obtaining top view

G
Let us assume that the horizontal plane (H.P) is hinged to the vertical plane so that, the
object is in front of the V.P and above the H.P. When the object is viewed from its top, the
PA
projection of object obtained on the horizontal plane is known as the top view or plan. This view
may represent the length and width of the object.
IP

To draw the front view and top view on a flat surface, one of the planes may be turned
TH

around so that it lies in extension with the other plane. Fig.7(b) shows the position of the planes,
when the H.P is turned and brought in line with the V.P. Fig.7(c) shows the two views of the
PA

object, drawn in correct relationship with each other.

3) Side view or End elevation

L
A
K

V.P. A.V.P.
FRONT VIEW

LEFT SIDE VIEW

X Y

TOP VIEW
H.P.

(a) (b) (c)

Fig.8 Obtaining side view

105
 Two views may not be sufficient to describe an object completely. An auxiliary vertical
plane (A.V.P) is therefore assumed to be placed perpendicular to both H.P and V.P. When the
object is viewed from its side, the projection of object obtained on the A.V.P is known as the side
view. It is also called as end view, side elevation or end elevation. This view may represent the
width and height of the object.

When the A.V.P is rotated and brought in line with the V.P, the view will be seen as shown
in fig.8(c). In first angle projection, the left side view of the object is placed to the right of the
front view.

4.8 Assumptions for reading a pictorial view

A hidden part of a symmetrical object should be assumed to be similar to the
corresponding visible part.
All holes, slots, grooves, etc. should be assumed to be drilled or at right through the
object, unless otherwise specified.
Suitable radius should be assumed when the radii of small curves, fillets, etc. are not

M
given.

A
4.9 Points to be considered while drawing orthographic projection from pictorial views

G
PA
While making the views, the longest face of the object or the most informative contour
may be treated as the front. The direction of front view is generally indicated by means
IP
of an arrow.
Lines which are parallel to the direction of vision will be seen as points, while surfaces
TH

which are parallel to it will be seen as lines.

The object which has both the right hand and left hand side symmetrical shape requires
PA

only two views. Three views are necessary for the objects which are not symmetrical.
The intersection of two surfaces and visible edges are shown by continuous lines. But the
L

hidden details are shown by dotted lines.

A

The centre lines of holes and cylindrical parts must be clearly indicated. The centre of a
K

circle is shown as the intersection of two mutually perpendicular centre lines. When it is
seen as a rectangle, one centre line is drawn to represent its axis.
When a visible line coincides with either a dotted line or a centre line, the visible line is
shown and a centre line extended beyond the outlines of the view.
When a dotted line coincides with the centre line, the dotted line should be shown.

4.10 General procedure for drawing orthographic views

Prepare freehand sketches of the required orthographic views from the pictorial view of
the object.
Determine the overall dimension of the required view. Select a suitable scale so that the
views are conveniently accommodated in the drawing sheet.
Prepare a sheet layout. Draw rectangles for each view, keeping sufficient space between
them and from the borders of the sheet.

106
Draw centre lines in all the views for circles and arcs.
Draw details simultaneously in all the views in the following order:
• Circles and arcs of circles.
• Straight lines for the general shape of the object.
• Straight lines, small curves, etc. for minor details.
Check whether all the hidden features are shown in the drawing by dotted lines.
Erase all unnecessary lines completely.
Fair the views with 2H or 3H pencil, making the outlines uniform and intensely black.
Dimension the views completely with required notes and titles.
Fill up the title block and add all other necessary particulars.

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

107
 FOR CIVIL ENGINEERING &
ALLIED COURSES

Unit - IV
CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING USING CAD
4.1 Important terminologies used in Civil Engineering drawings
The following are the important terminologies used in Civil Engineering drawings :
1) Concrete : It is mixture of stone jelly (gravel), sand and cement with required quantity of
water. It is used to preopare the roof, floor, sunshade, etc. in building construction.

2) Plain Cement Concrete (PCC) : It is a mixture of concrete consisting of cement, sand and
coarse aggregate (stone jelly) in the ratio of 1:4:8 without reinforced steel. It is used for

M
foundation footings bed for the walls and to prepare flooring in a building construction.

A
3) Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) : It is a mixture of concrete consisting of cement,

G
sand and coarse aggregate (stone jelly) in the ratio of 1:2:4 with reinforced steel rods. RCC

PA
is uded for roof, lintel beam, sunshade and plinth beam in constcution.

4) Cement mortar : The mixture of mortal consists of cement and fine aggregrate (sand) with
IP
required quantity of water.
TH

5) Masonry : The art of building a structure in stones or bricks is called masonry. When stones
are used in constructing a structure, the masonry is called as stone masonry. When bricks
PA

are used in constructing a structure, the masonry is called as brick masonry.

6) Foundation (Substructure): it is the portion of the building below the ground level which
L

is in direct contact with the ground, to transmit the loads of the building to the ground.
A

7) Super structure : It is the portion of the building above the ground level. It includes plinth,
K

wall, lintel, roof, etc.

8) Basement : It is the lower storey of a building which is partly below the ground leve. It is
used for vehicle parking or for storage of goods.
9) Plinth and Plinth level : It is the portion of the building between the ground and floor
level.Its height above the ground level is known as plinth level or plinth height.
10) Window sill level : It is the level at which a window frame is installed above the finished
floor level.

11) Lintel level : It is the top level of the doors and windows.

12) Slab level : It the the level at which either an RCC slap or other type of slab is placed.

13) Wall : It is the portion of the super structre which carrys the load of the roof.

14) Parapet Wall : It is the wall built above the flat roof, which provides safety ot the people
while they are on the top of the roof in a building.

108
15) Partition wall : They are used to make separation or division in a room. It is designed as a
non-load bearing wall.

16) Lintels : They are RCC or stone beams provided over the door and window openinngs to
transfer the load.

17) Roof : It is the top most portion of the building which provides top cover to the building.

18) Plinth area : It is the area occupied by a building at the plinthe level.

19) Floor area : It is the area of a building excluding the area occupied by walls.

20) Carpet area : It is the area of a building which is useful or livabie.

4.2 Basic conventional symbols

1) Materials
As per IS 962 : 1989, various symbols for materials in a section are represented as shown
in the following table.

M
Hatch Hatch

A
Material Symbol pattern Material Symbol pattern
in AutoCAD in AutoCAD

G
Brick BRICK PA Natural or
Reconstructed ANSI33
stone
IP

Partition
TH

Brick ANSI32 NET

blocks
PA

Earth or
Concrete AR-CONC EARTH
Sand filling
L
A

Steel ANSI31 Plaster AR-SAND

K

No Pattern
Wood Glass GOST_GLASS
Random arcs

To apply hatch pattern to objects :

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0
Specify other corner point: @100,50
Command: BHATCH
Select the rectangle
Select the required hatch pattern from the dialog box and set the properties.
For wood pattern, draw random arcs using SKETCH command.

109
2) Doors
Doors are generally used to separate interior spaces for convenience, privacy, safety,
and security reasons. Doors are also used to secure passages into a building from the exterior,
for reasons of climate control and safety. Commonly used sizes of doors are 1200 mm x 2100
mm (single door) or 800 mm x 2100 mm (double door). The symbols to represent doors in plan
and the command sequence to draw these symbols are also explained below.

a) Single door
Command: LIMITS
Specify lower left corner: 0,0
Specify upper right corner: @3000,3000
Command: ZOOM
[All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/
Scale/Window/Object]: ALL
Command: RECTANG

200
M
Specify first corner point : 0,0
400 1200 400
Specify other corner point: @400,200

A
Command: RECTANG Single Door

G
1200 mm x 2100 mm
Specify first corner point : 1600,0
Specify other corner point: @400,200 PA
Command: LINE
IP
Specify first point : 300,0
TH

Specify next point: @0,200

Command: LINE
PA

Specify first point : 1900,0

Specify next point: @0,200
Command: ARC
L
A

Specify start point of arc: 1600,200

Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: E
K

Specify end point of arc: 400,1400

Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]: R
Specify radius of arc: 1200

b) Double door
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0
Specify other corner point: @400,200
Command: LINE
200

Specify first point : 300,0

Specify next point: @0,200 400 800 800 400
Command: ARC
Double Door
Specify start point of arc: 1200,200 800 mm x 2100 mm

110
 Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: E
Specify end point of arc: 400,1000
Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]: R
Specify radius of arc: 800
Command: MIRROR
Select objects: All
Specify first point of mirror line: 1200,200
Specify second point of mirror line: @800<90
Erase source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: N

3) Windows
Windows are prpvided in a building to have ventilation and light inside the building.
Windows ae located in suitable position depending on the size of the room. Commonly used sizes
are 900 mm x 1200 mm and 1200 mm x 1200 mm. The symbol to represent windows in plan
and the command sequence to draw the symbol is also explained below.

200
Command: RECTANG

A
Specify first corner point : 0,0 400 900 400

G
Specify other corner point: @1700,200 Window
Command: LINE
Specify first point : 400,0
PA 900 mm x 1200 mm
IP
Specify next point: @0,200
TH

Command: LINE
Specify first point : 1300,0
PA

Specify next point: @0,200

Command: LINE
Specify first point : 400,100
L

Specify next point: @900,0

A
K

4) Walls
The primary function of a wall in a building is to provide structural support and create
separation between different spaces. The common thickness of a wall is 200 mm. The symbol to
represent walls in plan and the command sequence to draw the symbol is also explained below.
200

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0
1500
Specify other corner point: @1500,200
Wall (200 mm thick)

5) Stairs or staircase
A staircase is the part of a building that helps us to move from one floor to another. For
different types of building the sizes of the stairs differ. A combination of 1 riser and 1 tread is
known as a step. The symbols to represent stairs in plan and the command sequence to draw
the symbols is also explained below.

111
 750
3200

350
750
L - stairs with U - stairs with
Straight stairs Landing Landing

a) Straight stairs
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0

M
Specify other corner point: @750,3200

A
Command: EXPLODE

G
Select objects: All
Command: OFFSET
Specify offset distance: 350
PA
IP
Select object to offset: Select the first line
Specify point on side to offset: Click above the first line
TH

Similarly create 7 offsets

Create the arrow mark using QLEADER
PA

b) L – stairs with landing

Create the straight stairs using the above commands
L

Create COPY of straight stairs and ROTATE it throuhg 90°C

A
K

MOVE and place the rotated stairs at the top left corner of first straight stairs.
Create the arrow mark using QLEADER

c) U – stairs with landing

Create the straight stairs using the above commands
Create COPY of straight stairs at a displacement distance of 100 mm.
Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM command.
Create the arrow mark using QLEADER

5) Sanitary installations
Sanitary installatons are the devices that are used to access or control the water supply
and drainage system. The symbols to represent the commonly used sanitary installations in plan
and the command sequence to draw the symbols is also explained below.

112
a) Toilet 500
Command: RECTANG

200
Specify first corner point : 75,0

100
Specify other corner point: @350,500
Command: RECTANG

500
Specify first corner point : 0,500
Specify other corner point: @500,200
Command: LINE
350
Specify first point : 75,400 Toilet
Specify next point: @350,0
Command: ELLIPSE
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse: 250,0
Specify other endpoint of axis:@500<90
Specify distance to other axis :350
Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM command.

M
Fillet the required edges with 40 mm radius using FILLET command.

A
b) Wash basin 500

G
Command: RECTANG
100

250
Specify first corner point : 200,0
Specify other corner point: @500,250
PA

200
IP
EXPLODE the rectangle.
Command: ARC
TH

Specify start point of arc: 0,200 Wash basin

Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: E

PA

Specify end point of arc: 500,200

Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]: R
L

Specify radius of arc: 250

A

OFFSET the rectangle and arc at a distance of 20mm

K

OFFSET the upper line at a distance of 100 mm

Draw three CIRCLES of radius 15 mm with centres at (250,300), (200,400) and (300,400)
TRIM the unwanted lines
FILLET the corners with a radius of 25 mm.

c) Kitchen sink 600

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0
400

Specify other corner point: @600,400

EXPLODE the rectangle.
OFFSET the rectangle at a distance of 20mm
Kitchen sink
OFFSET the upper line at a distance of 50 mm
Draw two CIRCLES of radius 15 mm with centres at (300,250) and (300,375).
TRIM the unwanted lines
FILLET the corners with a radius of 25 mm.

113
 FOR EEE & ALLIED COURSES

Unit – IV
BASIC ELECTRICAL WIRING
CIRCUITS USING CAD
4.1 Basic electrical symbols
Electrical symbols are a graphical representation of basic electrical devices or components.
These symbols are used in circuits and electrical diagrams to recognize a component. It is also
called a schematic symbol. Each component has typical functionality according to its operational
characteristics. Electrical symbols used in circuits are defined by various national and
international standards. E.g. IEC standard, JIC standard, ANSI standard, IEEE standard, etc.

The basic electrical symbols used in circuits and the command sequence to draw these

M
symbols in AutoCAD are also explained below.

A
G
1) Fuse 5 A R2
a) Common symbol
Draw a circle
PA
IP
B C
Command: CIRCLE 15
C2
C1
TH

Specify center point for circle: Pick a suitable point

Specify radius of circle: 2
PA

Copy the circle

Command: COPY Fuse - Common symbol
Select objects: Select circle C1
L

Specify base point: Select the center of the circle – Use CENter osnap.
A

Specify second point: @15<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 15)
K

Draw two tangent lines to the circles

Command: LINE
Specify first point : tan to (select top of circle C1) (Note : type tan and press space bar)
Specify next point: tan to (select bottom of circle C2)
Command: LINE
Specify first point : tan to (select bottom of circle C1)
Specify next point: tan to (select top of circle C2)
Draw two lines from the quadrant points of circles
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Click at B (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Specify next point: @5<180 (or move the cursor horizontally leftwards and type 5)
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Click at C (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Specify next point: @5<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 5)

114
[Note : The given dimensions are not standard. Resize the symbol as required.]
Command: SCALE
Select objects : Select the symbol
Specify base point : Click a point inside the symbol
Specify scale factor : 1.5
[Note : Enter scale factor greater than 1 to enlarge the drawing
Enter scale factor less than 1 (0 to 1) to reduce the drawing.]

b) IEEE standard symbol 10

Draw a rectangle
Command: RECTANG D E

5
M
Specify first corner point: Pick a suitable point
Specify other corner point: @10,5
Draw a horizontal line by joining midpoints of rectangle
Command: LINE
Specify first point: Click at D (Use MIDpoint osnap) Fuse - IEEE standard symbol

M
Specify next point: Click at E (Use MIDpoint osnap)

A
Resize the line two times larger

G
Command: SCALE
Select objects : Select the line DE
PA
Specify base point : Click at M (Use MIDpoint osnap)
IP
Specify scale factor : 2
Resize the entire symbol as required using SCALE command.
TH

c) IEC standard symbol 10

PA

Draw a rectangle
Command: RECTANG F G

5
Specify first corner point: Pick a suitable point
L

2
Specify other corner point: @10,5
A

EXPLODE the rectangle

K

Offset the vertical lines 2 mm inside

Command: OFFSET Fuse - IEC standard symbol
Specify offset distance: 2
Select object to offset: Select the vertical line
Specify point on side to offset: Click inside the rectangle
Select object to offset: Select another vertical line
Specify point on side to offset: Click inside the rectangle
Draw a two horizontal lines from the midpoints of rectangle
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Click at F (Use MIDpoint osnap)
Specify next point: @5<180 (or move the cursor horizontally leftwards and type 5)
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Click at G (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Specify next point: @5<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 5)
Resize the entire symbol as required using SCALE command.
115
2) Main switch (or) SPST (Single Pole, Single Throw) switch R1
1 2 3 4
(a) Switch close 7
Draw a circle
Command: CIRCLE
Specify center point for circle: Pick a suitable point SPST Switch (Close)
Specify radius of circle: 1
Copy the circle
Command: COPY SPST Switch (Open)
Select objects: Select the circle
Specify base point: Select the center of the circle – Use CENter osnap.
Specify second point: @7<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 7)
Draw three lines from the quadrant points of circles
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at 1 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Specify next point: @5<180 (or move the cursor horizontally leftwards and type 5)

M
Command: LINE

A
Specify first point : Pick at 4 (Use QUAdrant osnap)

G
Specify next point: @5<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 5)
Command: LINE PA
Specify first point : Pick at 2 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
IP
Specify next point: Pick at 3 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Command: LINE
TH

Select line 2-3 and change the LINEWEIGHT = 1 (Greater than other lines)
PA

(b) Switch open

Draw the switch symbol using the above commands. Rotate line 2-3 to 30°
L

Command: ROTATE
A

Select objects: Select line 2-3

K

Specify base point: Select the center of the first circle (Use CENter osnap)
Specify rotation angle: 30

3) DPST (Double Pole, Single Throw) switch

Draw the SPST switch in open position as explained above.

Copy the SPST switch
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the SPST switch
DPST switch
Specify base point: Select the center of the circle – Use CENter
osnap.
Specify second point: @5<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 5)
Draw a vertical line connecting the midpoints of the two lines as shown in the figure.
Select the vertical line. Change linetype = HIDDEN and linetype scale = 5

116
4) TPST (Triple Pole, Single Throw) switch
Draw the SPST switch in open position as explained above.
Copy the SPST switch
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the SPST switch
Specify base point: Select the center of the circle – Use CENter
TPST switch
osnap.
Specify second point: @5<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 5)
Specify second point: @10<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 10)
Draw a vertical line connecting the midpoints of the two lines as shown in the figure.
Select the vertical line. Change linetype = HIDDEN and linetype scale = 5

5) SPDT (Single Pole, Double Throw) switch C3

Draw a circle C2
Command: CIRCLE
L2
Specify center point for circle: Pick a suitable point

M
C1
Specify radius of circle: 1

A
Draw a line from the quadrant point of circle

G
Command: LINE
PA
Specify first point : Pick at quadrant point of circle (Use
QUAdrant osnap) SPDT Switch
IP
Specify next point: @5<180 (or move the cursor horizontally
TH

leftwards and type 5)

Copy the circle
PA

Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the circle
Specify base point: Select the center of the circle C1– Use CENter osnap.
L

Specify second point: @10<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 7)
A

Draw a line from the quadrant point of circle C2

K

Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at quadrant point of circle C2 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Specify next point: @5<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 5)
Copy circle C2 and line L2
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select circle C2 and L2
Specify base point: Select the center of the circle C2– Use CENter osnap.
Specify second point: @3<90 (or move the cursor vertically upwards and type 3)
Specify second point: @3<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 3)
Draw a line joining the center points of circles C1 and C3
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at center point of circle C1 (Use CENter osnap)
Specify first point : Pick at center point of circle C3 (Use CENter osnap)
Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM and ERASE commands.

117
6) Push button
(a) Closed position
Draw a circle
Command: CIRCLE Push button Push button
(Close) (Open)
Specify center point for circle: Pick a suitable point
Specify radius of circle: 1
Copy the circle
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the circle
Specify base point: Select the center of the circle – Use CENter osnap.
Specify second point: @5<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 5)
Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) joining the lower quadrant points of circle
Draw a vertical LINE (L2)of 5mm length from the midpoint of Line L1.

(b) Open position

Draw the push button in closed position as explained above.

M
Select lines L1 and L2. MOVE them above circle.

A
7) Light bulb / Lamp L2

G
Draw a circle
Command: CIRCLE PA L1
Light bulb /
Specify center point for circle: Pick a suitable point
IP
Lamp
Specify radius of circle: 3
TH

Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) and vertical LINE (L2) joining the quadrant points of circle.
Select lines L1 and L2. ROTATE them through 45° about center point of circle.
PA

Draw two horizontal LINES of length 3mm from the quadrant points of circle.

8) Electric bell
L

Draw a circle 5
A

Command: CIRCLE 1 3 2
K

Specify center point for circle: Pick a suitable point L1

Specify radius of circle: 5 4
Draw a line joining the quadrant points of circle
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at 1 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Specify next point : Pick at 2 (Use QUAdrant osnap) Electric Bell
Draw a line
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at 3 (Approx. 2mm from the center of circle)
Specify next point: @3.5<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 3.5)
Mirror the line
Command: MIRROR
Select objects: Select Line L1
Specify first point of mirror line: Pick at 4

118
 Specify second point of mirror line: Pick at 5
Erase source objects? [Yes/No] : N
Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.

9) Buzzer 5
Draw a circle
1 3 2
Command: CIRCLE
L1
Specify center point for circle: Pick a suitable point 4
Specify radius of circle: 5
Draw a line joining the quadrant points of circle
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at 1 (Use QUAdrant osnap) Buzzer
Specify next point : Pick at 2 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Draw a line
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at 3 (Approx. 2mm from the center of circle)

M
Specify next point: @8<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 8)

A
Mirror the line

G
Command: MIRROR
Select objects: Select Line L1
Specify first point of mirror line: Pick at 4
PA
IP
Specify second point of mirror line: Pick at 5
TH

Erase source objects? [Yes/No] : N

Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
PA

10) Timer
Draw a CIRCLE of radius 5mm
L

Draw a vertical LINE of length 3mm from the center of the circle.
A

Draw a horizontal LINE of length 3mm from the center of the circle.
Timer
K

11) MCB (Miniature Circuit Breaker)

Draw a horizontal LINE of 5mm length.
COPY the line at a distance of 5mm from the end point.
Draw an ARC of radius 3mm connecting end points of the two lines. MCB
MOVE the arc 1mm upwards.
Draw a CIRCLEs of radius 0.5mm with the centres at the end points of lines.

12) Earth / Ground

Draw a horizontal line A
L1
Command: LINE L2
L3
Specify first point : Pick a suitable point
Specify next point: @10<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards
and type 10)
Draw a vertical line Earth / Ground

119
 Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at A (Midpoint of line L1 – Use MIDpoint osnap)
Specify next point: @5<90 (or move the cursor vertically upwards and type 5)
Make two copies of line L1
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select line L1
Specify base point: Select the midpoint of line – Use MIDpoint osnap.
Specify second point: @2<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 2)
Specify second point: @4<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 4)
Resize the lines L2 and L3
Command: SCALE
Select objects : Select the line L2
Specify base point : Click at midpoint of L2 (Use MIDpoint osnap)
Specify scale factor : 0.5
Command: SCALE

M
Select objects : Select the line L3

A
Specify base point : Click at midpoint of L3 (Use MIDpoint osnap)

G
Specify scale factor : 0.25

13) Neutral link PA L1 45°

Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) of 15 mm length
IP
Draw a LINE of 5mm length (L2) with an inclination of 45°. L2
TH

Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick a suitable point Neutral Link
PA

Specify next point: @5<45

MOVE line L2 and place over line L1 so that midpoints coincide.
Draw a donut at the end of line L2
L
A

Command: DONUT
Specify inside diameter of donut: 0
K

Specify outside diameter of donut: 1

Specify center of donut: Pick the endpoint of L2 (use ENDpoint osnap)

A V W Hz Cos ϕ Wh
Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Frequency Power factor Energy meter
meter meter
14) Ammeter
Draw a CIRCLE of radius 5mm
Add text A at the center of circle using MTEXT command. Set Justify = Middle center

15) Voltmeter
Draw a CIRCLE of radius 5mm
Add text V at the center of circle using MTEXT command. Set Justify = Middle center

120
16) Wattmeter
Draw a CIRCLE of radius 5mm
Add text W at the center of circle using MTEXT command. Set Justify = Middle center

17) Frequency meter

Draw a CIRCLE of radius 5mm
Add text Hz at the center of circle using MTEXT command. Set Justify = Middle center

18) Power factor meter

Draw a CIRCLE of radius 5mm
Add text Cos ϕ at the center of circle using MTEXT command. Set Justify = Middle center
(To add ϕ, select font name as Symbol and type the letter j)

19) Energy meter / Watt hour meter

Draw a square and a rectangle as shown in figure using RECTANG command.
Add text Wh at the center of square using MTEXT command. Set Justify = Middle center

M
A
20) Windings / Coil / Inductor

G
Draw a CIRCLE of radius 3 mm. C1

PA
Make multiple copies of this circle so that the distance
between the centers of adjacent circles = 4mm (Greater than
A B
IP
R3 4
the radius of first circle).
TH

Command: COPY
Select objects: Select circle C1
Windings / coil /
PA

Specify base point: Select the center of the circle – Use

Inductor
CENter osnap.
Specify second point: @4<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 4)
L

Specify second point: @8<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 8)
A

Specify second point: @12<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 12)
K

Specify second point: @16<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 16)
Specify second point: @20<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 20)
Draw horizontal LINEs of 5mm length from the quadrant points A and B.
Remove the unwanted portions using TRIM and ERASE commands.
Resize the symbol as required using SCALE command.

21) Over Load Relay (OLR)

Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick a suitable point
Specify next point: @5<270 OLR
Specify next point: @5<0 (Over Load Relay)
Specify next point: @3<270
Specify next point: @5<180
Specify next point: @5<270

121
22) Rotor
Draw a CIRCLE of radius 10mm.
Draw another CIRCLE of radius 5mm with the same
center. R5
Draw a LINE (L1) joining quadrant points of circles. R10 R1
L1 Rotor
Use QUAdrant osnap.
Draw a CIRCLE of radius 1mm with center at the midpoint of L1. Use MIDpoint osnap
Create a polar array of this circle.
Command: ARRAYPOLAR
Specify center point of array: Pick at the center of larger circle. Use CENter osnap.
Select grip to edit array or [ASsociative/Base point/Items/Angle between/Fill angle/
ROWs/Levels/ROTate items/eXit]: I
Enter number of items in array: 12

23) Connection symbol

M
Draw vertical and horizontal lines of 10 length so that to intersect at midpoints.

A
Draw a donut at the intersection point.
Connection

G
Command: DONUT
Specify inside diameter of donut: 0
Specify outside diameter of donut: 2
PA
IP
Specify center of donut: Pick the intersection point of two lines.
TH

24) No connection symbol

Draw vertical and horizontal lines of 10mm length so that to intersect
PA

at midpoints.
Draw a CIRCLE of radius 1mm at the intersection point of two lines. No connection
L

Remove the unwanted portions using TRIM command.

A
K

122
 FOR ECE, COMPUTER ENGINEERING
& ALLIED COURSES

Unit – IV
BASIC ELECTRONICS CIRCUITS USING CAD
4.1 Basic electronics symbols
Electronics symbols are a graphical representation of basic electronics devices or
components. These symbols are used in circuit diagrams to recognize a component. It is also
called a schematic symbol. Each component has typical functionality according to its operational
characteristics. Electronics symbols used in circuits are defined by various national and
international standards. E.g. IEC standard, JIC standard, ANSI standard, IEEE standard, etc.

The basic electronics symbols used in circuits and the command sequence to draw these

M
symbols in AutoCAD are also explained below.

A
1) Resistor L2
A

G
Draw an inclined line L1 B C
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at suitable point
PA 3 4 5 6 7
L1
IP
Specify next point: @5<60
Vertically mirror the line L1
TH

Command: MIRROR Resistor

Select objects: Select line L1
PA

Specify first point of mirror line: Click at A (Use ENDpoint osnap)

Specify second point of mirror line: @5<270
L

Make 4 copies of line L1 and L2

A

Command: COPY
K

Select objects: Select lines L1 and L2

Specify base point: Pick at 3 (Use ENDpoint osnap)
Specify second point: Pick at 4 (Use ENDpoint osnap)
Specify second point: Pick at 5 (Use ENDpoint osnap)
Specify second point: Pick at 6 (Use ENDpoint osnap)
Specify second point: Pick at 7 (Use ENDpoint osnap)
Draw a horizontal line from B
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at B
Specify next point: @5<270(or move the cursor horizontally leftwards and type 5)
Draw a horizontal line from C
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at C
Specify next point: @5<0(or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 5)
Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.

123
2) Capacitor
Draw a horizontal LINE of length 5mm.
OFFSET this line 2mm above.
Draw two vertical LINES of length 5mm from the midpoints of horizontal lines. Capacitor/
Condensor
3) Inductor
Draw a CIRCLE of radius 3 mm. C1
Make multiple copies of this circle so that the distance A B
between the centers of adjacent circles = 4mm (Greater than
R3 4
the radius of first circle).
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select circle C1
Windings / coil /
Specify base point: Select the center of the circle – Use
Inductor
CENter osnap.
Specify second point: @4<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 4)

M
Specify second point: @8<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 8)
Specify second point: @12<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 12)

A
Specify second point: @16<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 16)

G
Specify second point: @20<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 20)
PA
Draw horizontal LINEs of 5mm length from the quadrant points A and B.
Remove the unwanted portions using TRIM and ERASE commands.
IP
Resize the symbol as required using SCALE command.
TH

4) PN Juntion Diode
PA

Draw an equilateral triangle of 10mm side. Anode Cathode

Command: POLYGON
Enter number of sides: 3
L

PN Junction Diode
A

Specify center of polygon or [Edge]: E

Specify first endpoint of edge: Pick at suitable point.
K

Specify second endpoint of edge: @10<270

Draw two vertical LINES of 5mm length upwards and downwards from the right corner of
triangle. Use ENDpoint osnap.
Draw a horizontal LINE of 10mm length from the right corner of triangle.
Draw a horizontal LINE of 10mm length from the midpoint of left edge of triangle.

5) Zener diode Anode Cathode

Draw the PN Junction Diode as explained above.
Draw two horizontal LINEs of 2mm length from the endpoints
Zener Diode
of vertical line.

124
6) BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor)
Draw a CIRCLE of radius = 8mm. L2 B
A
Draw a horizontal LINE of length 5mm leftwards
L1
from A (Quadrant point of circle)
Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) of length 5mm Collector Emitter
rightwards from A (Quadrant point of circle)
Draw a vertical LINE (L2) of length 2.5mm
upwards from endpoint of L1. Base Base
Draw an inclined LINE from midpoint of L2.
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at midpoint of L2 Emitter Collector

Specify next point: @10<45 NPN PNP

BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor)
Draw a vertical LINE of length 5 mm from B
(intersection of line and circle)
Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM command.

M
Select and MIRROR the entire drawing about L1.

A
Create arrow head using QLEADER command

G
Add text using MTEXT command

7) JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistor)

Draw a CIRCLE of radius = 8mm.
PA Drain
IP
Draw a horizontal LINE of length 5mm
L2
TH

leftwards from A (Quadrant point of circle). A Gate

Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) of length 5mm L3
L1
PA

rightwards from A (Quadrant point of circle).

Draw a vertical LINE (L2) of length 5mm
Collector (Source)
upwards from endpoint of L1.
L

JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistor)

Draw a horizontal LINE (L3) of length 5mm
A

rightwards from midpoint of L2.

K

Draw a vertical LINE of length 10mm from endpoint of L3.

Select and MIRROR the entire drawing about L1.
Create arrow head using QLEADER command.
Add text using MTEXT command.

8) MOSFET (Metal-Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor)

Draw a CIRCLE of radius = 8mm.
Drain
Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) joining
quadrant points (A & B) of circle. L2
Draw a horizontal LINE of length 5mm A C B Gate Substrate
leftwards from A. L3
L1
Draw a horizontal LINE of length 5mm
rightwards from B.
Collector
MOSFET
125
 Draw a vertical LINE (L2) of length 5mm upwards from point C which is 5mm away from A.
Draw a horizontal LINE (L3) of length 5mm rightwards from midpoint of L2.
Draw a vertical LINE of length 10mm from endpoint of L3.
Select and MIRROR the entire drawing about L1.
Create arrow head using QLEADER command.
Add text using MTEXT command.

9) VCC (Voltage Common Collector)

Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) of length 5mm
VCC
Draw a vertical LINE of length 5mm downwards from midpoint of Line L1.

10) GND (Ground)

Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) of length 5mm GND (Ground)
Draw a vertical LINE of length 5mm upwards from midpoint of Line L1.

11) GND (Ground) A

M
L1
Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) of length 10mm L2

A
L3
Draw a vertical LINE of length 5mm upwards from midpoint (A) of L1.

G
Make two copies of line L1 using COPY command.
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select line L1
PA Earth / Ground
IP
Specify base point: Select the midpoint of of line – Use MIDpoint osnap.
Specify second point: @2<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 2)
TH

Specify second point: @4<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 4)
PA

Resize the lines L2 and L3

Command: SCALE
Select objects : Select the line L2
L

Specify base point : Click at midpoint of L2 (Use MIDpoint osnap)

A

Specify scale factor : 0.5

K

Command: SCALE
Select objects : Select the line L3
Specify base point : Click at midpoint of L3 (Use MIDpoint osnap)
Specify scale factor : 0.25

12) Transformer L1
Draw inductor as explained above.
Draw a vertical LINE (L1) joining quadrants of first and last circle.
Make two copies of line L1 at a distance of 3mm and 4 mm using
COPY command. L2 Transformer
Select and MIRROR the entire drawing vertically about line L2.
Remove the unwanted portions using TRIM and ERASE commands.

126
13) Switch R1
(a) Switch close 1 2 3 4
Draw a circle 7
Command: CIRCLE
Specify center point for circle: Pick a suitable point
Switch (Close)
Specify radius of circle: 1
Copy the circle
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the circle
Switch (Open)
Specify base point: Select the center of the circle – Use CENter osnap.
Specify second point: @7<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 7)
Draw three lines from the quanrant points of circles
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at 1 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Specify next point: @5<180 (or move the cursor horizontally leftwards and type 5)

M
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at 4 (Use QUAdrant osnap)

A
Specify next point: @5<0 (or move the cursor horizontally rightwards and type 5)

G
Command: LINE
PA
Specify first point : Pick at 2 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Specify next point: Pick at 3 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
IP
Command: LINE
TH

Select line 2-3 and change the LINEWEIGHT = 1 (Greater than other lines)

(b) Switch open

PA

Draw the switch symbol using the above commands. Rotate line 2-3 to 30°
Command: ROTATE
L

Select objects: Select line 2-3

A

Specify base point: Select the center of the first circle (Use CENter osnap)
K

Specify rotation angle: 30

14) Buzzer 5
Draw a circle
1 3 2
Command: CIRCLE
L1
Specify center point for circle: Pick a suitable point 4
Specify radius of circle: 5
Draw a line joining the quadrant points of circle
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at 1 (Use QUAdrant osnap) Buzzer
Specify next point : Pick at 2 (Use QUAdrant osnap)
Draw a line
Command: LINE
Specify first point : Pick at 3 (Approx. 2mm from the center of circle)
Specify next point: @8<270 (or move the cursor vertically downwards and type 8)

127
 Mirror the line
Command: MIRROR
Select objects: Select Line L1
Specify first point of mirror line: Pick at 4
Specify second point of mirror line: Pick at 5
Erase source objects? [Yes/No] : N
Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.

15) Battery
L1
+
Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) of length 5mm. L2
L3
Make three copies of line L1 at a distance of 2mm from each other L4 _
using COPY command.
SCALE the lines L2 and L4 to 0.5 times. Battery
Draw a vertical LINE of length 5 mm upwards from the midpoint of line L1.
Draw a vertical LINE of length 5 mm downwards from the midpoint of line L4.

M
Add + and – symbol using MTEXT command.

A
G
16) Connection symbol

PA
Draw vertical and horizontal lines of 10 length so that to intersect at midpoints.
Draw a donut at the intersection point.
Connection
IP
Command: DONUT
Specify inside diameter of donut: 0
TH

Specify outside diameter of donut: 2

Specify center of donut: Pick the intersection point of two lines.
PA

17) No connection symbol

L

Draw vertical and horizontal lines of 10mm length so that to intersect

A

at midpoints.
K

Draw a CIRCLE of radius 1mm at the intersection point of two lines. No connection
Remove the unwanted portions using TRIM command.

128
K
A
L
PA
TH
IP
PA
G
A
M
K
A
L
PA
TH
IP
PA
G
A
M
 MANUAL DRAFTING
(COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)
Ex.No.1(A) LETTERING AND NUMBERING (UPPER CASE LETTERS)

M
Aim: To write the given statements in a single stroke upper case letters of given height.

A
Procedure: Refer : Example of single stroke lettering – Upper case letters.

G
Ex.No.1(B)
PA
LETTERING AND NUMBERING (LOWER CASE LETTERS)
IP
Aim: To write the given statements in a single stroke lower case letters of given height.
TH

Procedure: Refer : Example of single stroke lettering – Lower case letters.

PA

Ex.Nos. 2( A) – 2( D) DIMENSIONING
Aim: To redraw the given drawing and dimension it as per BIS.
L
A

Procedure: Refer : Dimensioning – Problems : 1 to 4

K

Ex.No.3(A) DIVIDING A STRAIGHT LINE AND CIRCLE INTO NUMBER OF

EQUAL DIVISIONS
Aim: To divide a straight line and circle into number of equal divisions
Procedure: Refer : Dividing a straight line – Solved Problem - Example : 1
Dividing a circle – Geometrical Constructions – Example : 5 & 6

Ex.No.3(B) CONSTRUCTING AN ARC TOUCHING TWO STRAIGHT LINES

Aim: To construct an arc touching two straight lines.
Procedure: Refer : Constructing arc– Solved Problems - Examples : 4, 5 & 6

129
Ex.No.3(C) CONSTRUCTING AN ARC TOUCHING TWO ARCS
Aim: To construct an arc touching two arcs
Procedure: Refer : Constructing arc– Solved Problems - Example : 8

Ex.No.4(A) CONSTRUCTION OF POLYGON – TRIANGLE

Aim: To draw the triangle of given dimension.
Procedure: Refer : Construction of triangle – Example : 1

Ex.No.4(B) CONSTRUCTION OF POLYGON – SQUARE

Aim: To draw the square of given dimension.
Procedure: Refer : Construction of square – Example : 2

M
Ex.No.4(C) CONSTRUCTION OF POLYGON – RECTANGLE

A
Aim: To draw the rectangle of given dimension.

G
Procedure: Refer : Construction of rectangle – Example : 3
PA
CONSTRUCTION OF POLYGON – PENTAGON
IP
Ex.No.4(D)
Aim: To draw the pentagon of given dimension.
TH

Procedure: Refer : Construction of pentagon – Example : 4

PA

Ex.No.4(E) CONSTRUCTION OF POLYGON – HEXAGON

L

Aim: To draw the hexagon of given dimension.

A

Procedure: Refer : Construction of pentagon – Example : 5

K

130
 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING
(COMMON TO ALL BRANCHES)
Ex.No.5(A) DRAWING AND DIMENSIONING USING CAD
Aim :
To create the drawing as shown in Fig.5(A).1 and dimension it as per BIS using CAD.

Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Create the drawing as shown in Fig.5(A).1.

M
Command: LINE

A
Specify first point: 0,0

G
Specify next point or [Undo]: @40<0
Specify next point or [Undo]: @10<90 PA
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @30<0
IP
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @30<90
TH

Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: @70<180

Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: C
PA

Command: CIRCLE
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: 20,25
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: 10
L

Command: CIRCLE
A

Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tan tan radius)]: 50,25
K

Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <10.0000>: 10

4. Draw the centre lines.
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 8,25
Specify next point or [Undo]: @24<0
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 20,13
Specify next point or [Undo]: @24<90
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 38,25
Specify next point or [Undo]: @24<0
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 50,13
Specify next point or [Undo]: @24<90

131
 20 10 20

40

25
40

10
30

Fig.5(A).1

M
A
20 30 Ø20, 2 HOLES

G
PA
IP

30
TH
40

PA
25

L
A

(0,0) 40
K

70

Fig.5(A).2

132
5. Change the linetype of the objects.
Select the centre lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = CENTER; Linetype scale = 5; Lineweight = 0.3 mm
Select all other lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = Bylayer; Linetype scale = 1; Lineweight = 0.5 mm
6. Select the entire drawing and Move to the centre of the page.
7. Dimension the drawing.
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.
Command: DIMLIN
Specify first extension line origin:Pick the start point
Specify second extension line origin: Pick the end point
Specify dimension line location or[Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/Rotated]: T
Enter dimension text: Enter the dimension value

M
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Pick at a suitable place.

A
Dimension the circles using DIMDIA command.

G
Command:DIMDIA
Select arc or circle:Selct the circle
PA
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:T
IP
Enter dimension text:%%C20, 2 HOLES
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:Pick at a suitable place.
TH

8. Add text using MTEXT command.

PA

9. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

10. The printout will be as shown in Fig.5(A).2.
L

Result:
A

The given drawing is created and dimensioned as per BIS using CAD.
K

133
 80 10 50

30R 30R

10R

25
30 25
30
80

10Ø

30Ø SEMICIRCLE

20
20

20
M
60°

A
G
PA
Fig.5(B).1
Fig.5(B).1
IP
140
TH

D C
PA

25

3 (115,55)
L
A

(80,55) 10
1 2
K

(30,50)
4 80
20

A
(0,0) (55,0) B
20

Fig.5(B).2

134
Ex.No.5(B) DRAWING AND DIMENSIONING USING CAD
Aim :
To create the drawing as shown in Fig.5(B).1 and dimension it as per BIS using CAD.
Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Create the drawing as shown in Fig.5(B).2.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0
Specify other corner point: @140,80
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0

M
Specify other corner point: @20,20

A
Command: RECTANG

G
Specify first corner point : 80,55
Specify other corner point: @10,25
Command: CIRCLE
PA
IP
Specify center point for circle: 55,0
Specify radius of circle: 15
TH

Command: CIRCLE
Specify center point for circle: 30,50
PA

Specify radius of circle: 10

Command: CIRCLE
L

Specify center point for circle: 115,55

A

Specify radius of circle: 5

K

4. Select all objects and EXPLODE.

5. Create fillets at corners C and D
Command: FILLET
Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: R
Specify fillet radius: 30
Select first object: Pick line AD
Select second object: Pick line CD
Press Enter
Select first object: Pick line CD
Select second object: Pick line BC
6. Create chamfer at corner B
Command: CHAMFER
Select first line or [Undo/Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/mEthod/Multiple]: A
Specify chamfer length on the first line: 20

135
 80 10 50

30 25

M
R30

A
G

25
PA
30

IP
TH

Ø10
80

Ø20
PA
L
20

20
60°
A
K

20 20
R15

Fig.5(B).3

136
 Specify chamfer angle from the first line : 30
Select first line: Select line BC
Select second line : Select line AB
7. Remove the unwanted portions in the drawing using TRIM and ERASE command.
Command: TRIM
Select cutting edges ...
Select objects:All
Select objects:<Enter>
Select object to trim:Select the unwanted lines in drawing
8. Draw the centre lines.
Command: LINE
Specify first point: Pick at quadrant point 1 using QUAdrant Osnap
Specify next point or [Undo]: Pick at quadrant point 2
Command: LINE
Specify first point: Pick at quadrant point 3

M
Specify next point or [Undo]: Pick at quadrant point 4

A
Enlarge the centre lines using SCALE command

G
Command: SCALE
Select objects: Select lines 1-2 & 3-4 PA
Select objects: <Enter>
IP
Specify base point: Pick at centre of circle
TH

Specify scale factor or [Reference]: 1.2

Similarly draw centre lines for other circles
PA

9. Change the linetype of the objects.

Select all centre lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
L

Linetype = CENTER; Linetype scale = 5; Lineweight = 0.3 mm

A

Select all other lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
K

Linetype = Bylayer; Linetype scale = 1; Lineweight = 0.5 mm

10. Select the entire drawing and Move to the centre of the page.
11. Dimension the drawing.
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.
Dimension the circles using DIMDIA command.
Dimension the arcs using DIMRAD command.
Dimension the angle using DIMANG command.
12. Add text using MTEXT command.
13. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.
14. The printout will be as shown in Fig.5(B).3.

Result:
The given drawing is created and dimensioned as per BIS using CAD.

137
 125

100 80Ø

55
110

15Ø

Ø40

M
A
15

G
PA 165
IP
Fig.5(C).1
TH
PA

D C
L
A
K
110

80

(70,55)

(125,55)

(25,15)
A B

(0,0)
25 140

Fig.5(C).2

138
Ex.No.5(C) DRAWING AND DIMENSIONING USING CAD
Aim :
To create the drawing as shown in Fig.5(C).1 and dimension it as per BIS using CAD.
Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Create the drawing as shown in Fig.5(C).2.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0
Specify other corner point: @20,110
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 25,15

M
Specify other corner point: @140,80

A
Command: CIRCLE

G
Specify center point for circle: 70,55
Specify radius of circle: 7.5 PA
Command: CIRCLE
IP
Specify center point for circle: 125,55
TH

Specify radius of circle: 20

4. Select all objects and EXPLODE.
PA

5. Create fillets at corners B and C

Command: FILLET
L

Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: R

A

Specify fillet radius: 40

K

Select first object: Pick line AB

Select second object: Pick line BC
Press Enter
Select first object: Pick line BC
Select second object: Pick line CD
6. Remove the unwanted portions in the drawing using TRIM and ERASE command.
Command: TRIM
Select cutting edges ...
Select objects:All
Select objects:<Enter>
Select object to trim:Select the unwanted lines in drawing
7. Draw the centre lines using LINE command and QUAdrant Osnap.
Enlarge the centre lines using SCALE command

139
 125

100

Ø15
R40

Ø40

M
A
G
110

PA
IP
TH
PA
15

55
L
A

165
K

Fig.5(C).3

140
8. Change the linetype of the objects.
Select all centre lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = CENTER; Linetype scale = 5; Lineweight = 0.3 mm
Select all other lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = Bylayer; Linetype scale = 1; Lineweight = 0.5 mm
9. Scale the drawing to fit into A4 size.
Command: SCALE
Select objects: ALL
Select objects: <Enter>
Specify base point: Pick at any point inside the drawing.
Specify scale factor: 0.8
10. Select the entire drawing and Move to the centre of the page.
11. Dimension the drawing.
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.

M
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.

A
Dimension the circles using DIMDIA command.

G
Dimension the arcs using DIMRAD command.
12. Add text using MTEXT command.
PA
13. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.
IP
14. The printout will be as shown in Fig.5(C).3.
TH

Result:
The given drawing is created and dimensioned as per BIS using CAD.
PA
L
A
K

141
 10
Ø30

10
Ø12

20
30

15R 25

30

25

Fig.5(D).1

M
A
10
(15,60)

G
PA30

10
15

(0,45)
IP
25

10
TH
15

Mirror line

10
A B
PA

(0,30) 80

Fig.5(D).2
L
A
K

AFTER MIRROR

Fig.5(D).3

142
Ex.No.5(D) DRAWING AND DIMENSIONING USING CAD
Aim :
To create the drawing as shown in Fig.5(D).1 and dimension it as per BIS using CAD.
Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Create the drawing as shown in Fig.5(D).2.
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 0,30
Specify next point: @15<270
Specify next point: @80<0

M
Specify next point: @10<90

A
Specify next point: @25<180

G
Specify next point: @10<90
Specify next point: @30<180
Specify next point: @10<90
PA
IP
Specify next point: @10<180
TH

Command: ARC
Specify start point of arc: 0,45
PA

Specify second point of arc or [Center/End]: E

Specify end point of arc: 15,60
Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]: R
L

Specify radius of arc: 15

A

4. Create mirror of the drawing

K

Command: MIRROR
Select objects: ALL
Specify first point of mirror line: Pick at A
Specify second point of mirror line: Pick at B
5. Create circles
Command: CIRCLE
Specify center point for circle: 25,30
Specify radius of circle: 6
Command: CIRCLE
Specify center point for circle: 55,30
Specify radius of circle: 6
6. Draw the centre lines using LINE command and QUAdrant Osnap.
Enlarge the centre lines using SCALE command

143
 R15

10
Ø12, 2 HOLES

M
A
10
G
PA
30

20
IP
TH
PA

R15
10 30 25
L
A
K

Fig.5(D).4

144
7. Change the linetype of the objects.
Select all centre lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = CENTER; Linetype scale = 5; Lineweight = 0.3 mm
Select all other lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = Bylayer; Linetype scale = 1; Lineweight = 0.5 mm
8. Select the entire drawing and Move to the centre of the page.
9. Dimension the drawing.
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.
Dimension the circles using DIMDIA command.
Dimension the arcs using DIMRAD command.
10. Add text using MTEXT command.
11. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.
12. The printout will be as shown in Fig.5(D).4.

M
A
Result:

G
The given drawing is created and dimensioned as per BIS using CAD.

PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

145
 K
A
L
PA
TH

146
Fig.6(A).1
IP
PA
G
A
M
 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING FOR
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING &
ALLIED COURSES
Ex.No.6(A) ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS USING CAD

Aim :
To draw the orthographic views of the component shown in Fig.6(A).1 using CAD.

Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set up the paper size to A4 (297 x 210)

M
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.

A
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (297 x 210).

G
3. Draw the TOP VIEW of the component.
Command: RECTANG PA
Specify first corner point : 90,0
IP
Specify other corner point: @100,60
TH

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 110,0
PA

Specify other corner point: @20,60

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 150,0
L

Specify other corner point: @20,60

A

4.
K

Draw the FRONT VIEW of of the component.

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 90,90
Specify other corner point: @100,75
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 110,140
Specify other corner point: @20,25
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 150,140
Specify other corner point: @20,25
Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM command

147
 20

25
M
A
G
(0,90) (90,90)

PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

(90,0)

Fig. 6(A).2 ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS

Fig.6(A).2 ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS

148
5. Draw the RIGHT SIDE VIEW of of the component.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,90
Specify other corner point: @60,75
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 0,140
Specify next point: @60,0
6. Change the linetype of the objects.
Select the hidden lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = HIDDEN; Linetype scale = 10; Lineweight = 0.3 mm
Select all other lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = Bylayer; Linetype scale = 1; Lineweight = 0.5 mm
7. Select the entire drawing and Move to the centre of the page.
8. Dimension the drawing.

M
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.

A
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.

G
9. Add text (FRONT VIEW, TOP VIEW, SIDE VIEW, etc.) using MTEXT command.

PA
10. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.
11. The printout will be as shown in Fig.6(A).2.
IP
TH

Result:
The orthographic views of the given component are drawn using CAD.
PA
L
A
K

149
 K
A
L
PA
TH

150
Fig.6(B).1
IP
PA
G
A
M
Ex.No.6(B) ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS USING CAD

Aim :
To draw the orthographic views of the component shown in Fig.6(B).1 using CAD.

Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set up the paper size to A4 (297 x 210)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (297 x 210).
3. Draw the TOP VIEW of the component.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 62,16
Specify other corner point: @56,16

M
Command: RECTANG

A
Specify first corner point : 86,8

G
Specify other corner point: @8,24
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 74,16
PA
IP
Specify next point: @6,-16
Specify next point: @20,0
TH

Specify next point: @6,16

Command: LINE
PA

Specify first point: 86,18

Specify next point: @8,0
L

Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM command

A

4. Draw the FRONT VIEW of of the component.

K

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 62,62
Specify other corner point: @56,8
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 80,62
Specify other corner point: @6,8
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 100,62
Specify other corner point: @6,8
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 89,70
Specify other corner point: @16,8

151
 14

16
M
A

8
G
(62,62)
(0,62) 24 18 20 18

RIGHT SIDE VIEW

PA FRONT VIEW
IP
TH

12 8 24
PA
16
L

32
A

(62,16)
K

(86,8)
(80,0)

TOP VIEW

Fig.6(B).2 ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS

152
5. Draw the RIGHT SIDE VIEW of of the component.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,62
Specify other corner point: @32,8
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 16,62
Specify next point: @0,8
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 32,70
Specify next point: @0,16
Specify next point: @-14,0
Specify next point: @-10,-16
6. Change the linetype of the objects.
Select all lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = Bylayer; Linetype scale = 1; Lineweight = 0.5 mm

M
7. Select the entire drawing and Move to the centre of the page.

A
8. Dimension the drawing.

G
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.
PA
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.
9. Add text (FRONT VIEW, TOP VIEW, SIDE VIEW, etc.) using MTEXT command.
IP

10. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

TH

11. The printout will be as shown in Fig.6(B).2.

PA

Result:
The orthographic views of the given component are drawn using CAD.
L
A
K

153
 K
A
L
PA
TH

154
Fig.6(C).1
IP
PA
G
A
M
Ex.No.6(C) ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS USING CAD
Aim :
To draw the orthographic views of the component shown in Fig.6(C).1 using CAD.

Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set up the paper size to A4 (297 x 210)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (297 x 210).
3. Draw the TOP VIEW of the component.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0
Specify other corner point: @70,80
Command: RECTANG

M
Specify first corner point : 20,0

A
Specify other corner point: @30,80
Command: LINE

G
Specify first point: 0,80
Specify next point: 35,0 PA
Specify next point: 70,80
IP

4. Draw the FRONT VIEW of of the component.

TH

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 20,110
PA

Specify other corner point: @30,20

Command: RECTANG
L

Specify first corner point : 0,130

A

Specify other corner point: @70,40

K

Command: LINE
Specify first point: 0,150
Specify next point: @70<0
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 35,150
Specify next point: @20<90
Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM command
5. Draw the LEFT SIDE VIEW of of the component.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 100,110
Specify other corner point: @80,60
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 100,130
Specify other corner point: @80,20

155
20
20

(0,130)
20

M
30
(100,110) 80

A
G
FRONT VIEW LEFT SIDE VIEW

PA
IP
TH
PA
80
L
A
K

(0,0)
70

TOP VIEW

Fig.6(C).2 ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS

156
6. Change the linetype of the objects.
Select the hidden lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = HIDDEN; Linetype scale = 10; Lineweight = 0.3 mm
Select all other lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = Bylayer; Linetype scale = 1; Lineweight = 0.5 mm
7. Select the entire drawing and Move to the centre of the page.
8. Dimension the drawing.
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.
9. Add text (FRONT VIEW, TOP VIEW, SIDE VIEW, etc.) using MTEXT command.
10. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.
11. The printout will be as shown in Fig.6(C).2.

M
Result:

A
The orthographic views of the given component are drawn using CAD.

G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

157
 K
A
L
PA
TH

158
Fig.6(D).1
IP
PA
G
A
M
Ex.No.6(D) ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS USING CAD

Aim :
To draw the orthographic views of the component shown in Fig.6(D).1 using CAD.

Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set up the paper size to A4 (297 x 210)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (297 x 210).
3. Draw the TOP VIEW of the component.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 10,0
Specify other corner point: @20,20
Command: RECTANG

M
Specify first corner point : 0,20

A
Specify other corner point: @40,30

G
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 0,30
Specify next point: @40,0
PA
IP
Command: CIRCLE
TH

Specify center point for circle: 20,30

Specify radius of circle: 10
PA

Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM command

4. Draw the FRONT VIEW of of the component.
Command: RECTANG
L

Specify first corner point : 0,80

A

Specify other corner point: @40,30

K

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 10,80
Specify other corner point: @20,30
Command: LINE
Specify first point: 0,90
Specify next point: @40<0
5. Draw the LEFT SIDE VIEW of of the component.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 70,80
Specify other corner point: @50,10
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 70,90
Specify other corner point: @20,20

159
 20

30
(80,90)

M
10

A
(0,80)
40 (70,80) 30 20

G
FRONT VIEW PA LEFT SIDE VIEW
IP
TH

R10
PA
20
L

(20,30)
A
10
K

20

(10,0)
20

TOP VIEW

Fig.6(D).2 ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEWS

160
 Command: LINE
Specify first point: 80,90
Specify next point: @20<90
6. Draw the centre lines using LINE command and QUAdrant Osnap.
Enlarge the centre lines using SCALE command
7. Change the linetype of the objects.
Select the hidden lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = HIDDEN; Linetype scale = 10; Lineweight = 0.3 mm
Select the center lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = CENTER; Linetype scale = 5; Lineweight = 0.3 mm
Select all other lines and set the following from the Properties panel.
Linetype = Bylayer; Linetype scale = 1; Lineweight = 0.5 mm
8. Select the entire drawing and Move to the centre of the page.

M
9. Dimension the drawing.
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.

A
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.

G
10. Add text (FRONT VIEW, TOP VIEW, SIDE VIEW, etc.) using MTEXT command.
PA
11. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.
IP
12. The printout will be as shown in Fig.6(D).2.
TH

Result:
The orthographic views of the given component are drawn using CAD.
PA
L
A
K

161
 25

L - Section
200 ISA 200200

25
M
A
200

G
Scale - 1:5
PA
IP
TH

60
5
PA
L
A
K

T - Section
100

ISJT 100

3.7

Scale - 1:2

162
 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING FOR
CIVIL ENGINEERING &
ALLIED COURSES
Ex.No.6(A) CROSS SECTIONAL VIEWS USING CAD
Aim :
To draw the cross sectional views of L-section, T-section, Channel section and I-section
using CAD.
Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set the drawing limits.
Command: LIMITS

M
Specify lower left corner: 0,0

A
Specify upper right corner: @3000,3000
Command: ZOOM

G
[All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window/Object]: ALL
3. Draw the sectional view of L-section.
PA
IP
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,500
TH

Specify other corner point: @200,25

Command: RECTANG
PA

Specify first corner point : 0,500

Specify other corner point: @25,200
L

Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM command

A

4. Draw the sectional view of T-section.

K

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 300,500
Specify other corner point: @3.7,100
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 261.85,600
Specify other corner point: @60,-5
Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM command
5. Draw the sectional view of Channel section.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0
Specify other corner point: @100,15.30
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,0
Specify other corner point: @400,8.6

163
 100

13.7
M
A
G
450

PA 11.3
400

8.6
IP

I - Section
TH

Channel - Section ISHB 450

ISMC 400
PA
L
A
K
15.3

250
Scale - 1:5 Scale - 1:5

164
 Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,400
Specify other corner point: @100,-15.3
Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM command
6. Draw the sectional view of T- section.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 250,0
Specify other corner point: @250,13.7
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 369.35,0
Specify other corner point: @11.3,450
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 250,450
Specify other corner point: @250,-13.7
Remove the unwanted portion using TRIM command
7. Resize the drawing to fit into A4 size for taking print out.

M
Command: SCALE

A
Select objects: Select L-section, Channel section and I-section

G
Specify base point: Pick any point inside the drawing
Specify scale factor: 0.2
Command: SCALE
PA
(For scale 1:5)
IP
Select objects: Select T-section
Specify base point: Pick any point inside the drawing
TH

Specify scale factor: 0.5 (For scale 1:2)

MOVE and arrange the drawings suitably
PA

8. Copy and paste the entire drawing into Layout.

Command: COPYCLIP (Ctrl + C)
Select objects: ALL
L

Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)

A

Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.

K

Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
Paste the copied drawing into this layout
Command: PASTECLIP (Ctrl + V)
Specify insertion point: Click a suitable point
9. Dimension the drawing.
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.
10. Add text using MTEXT command.
11. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result:
The cross sectional views of L-section, T-section, Channel section and I-section are
drawn using CAD.

165
 1300
7
M

600
Sunshade 900

200
1 N
Window - W

M
A
G
3500 x 4000
PA
4300

3 2
IP
TH

Section line
PA

200
R1 1000
L

Door - D
5
A

4 Q
K

(0,0)

250 250 250

6
200 50
C
B
A
8 1200
3800 Steps

PLAN

166
Ex.No.6(B) PLAN, ELEVATION AND
SECTIONAL VIEWS OF BUILDING
Aim :
To draw the plan, elevation and sectional view of a single storey, single room
buildingconsisting of RCC flat roof, masonry walls, lintel cum sunshade, door and windows of
standard size using CAD.
Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set the drawing limits.
Command: LIMITS
Specify lower left corner: 0,0
Specify upper right corner: @15000,10000
Command: ZOOM
[All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window/Object]: ALL

M
To draw the plan :

A
3. Draw the walls

G
Command: RECTANG (R1)
Specify first corner point : 0,0
Specify other corner point: @3800,4300
PA
IP
Command: OFFSET
Specify offset distance : 50
TH

Select object to offset : Select rectangle R1

Specify point on side to offset : Click inside the rectangle
PA

Command: OFFSET
Specify offset distance : 250
L

Select object to offset : Select rectangle R1

A

Specify point on side to offset : Click inside the rectangle

K

4. Draw the window (W)

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point
Specify other corner point: @900,200
EXPLODE the rectangle
OFFSET the horizontal lines of rectangle inside at a distance of 75 mm
Draw the sunshade
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point
Specify other corner point: @1300,600
Select sunshade. Change linetype=HIDDEN and linetype scale = 5
Command: MOVE
Select objects: Select the sunshade
Specify base point: Click the mid-point of lower horizontal line of sunshade – Use MID osnap
Specify second point: Click the mid-point of upper horizontal line of window – Use MID osnap

167
 3700

50 1200

M
Sunshade R2

A
80 100 R1

G
600 (50,8200)
PA
3720

2100
IP
TH
2100

Door
50
PA

M
1000
L

(50,6100) 1200
A

N
150
K
600

C
B
A
(0,5500) Q P
3800 Steps

ELEVATION

168
5. Copy the sunshade to required place
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the sunshade alone
Specify base point: Click at M (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
Specify second point:Click at 4 (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
6. Copy the window and sunshade to required places
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the window and sunshade
Specify base point: Click at N (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
Specify second point:Click at 1 (Mid-point of inner wall of room) – Use MID osnap
Rotate the window and sunshade to -90°C
Command: ROTATE
Select objects: Select the window and sunshade
Specify base point: Cilck at N
Specify rotation angle or: -90

M
COPY the rotated window and sunshade to Point 2

A
ROTATE the window and sunshade again to -180°C

G
COPY the rotated window and sunshade to Point 3
7. Draw the door (D)
Command: RECTANG
PA
IP
Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point
Specify other corner point: @1000,200
TH

Move the door to required place

Command: MOVE
PA

Select objects: Select the door

Specify base point: Click at P (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
L

Specify second point:Click at 5 (Mid-point of inner wall of room) – Use MID osnap
A

8. Draw the steps

K

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point A
Specify other corner point: @1200,250
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the rectangle
Specify base point: Click at A (End-point of rectangle) – Use END osnap
Specify second point:Click at B (End-point of rectangle) – Use END osnap
Specify second point:Click at C (End-point of rectangle) – Use END osnap
Move the steps to required place
Command: MOVE
Select objects: Select steps
Specify base point: Click at Q (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
Specify second point: Click at 6 (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap

169
 4000
B

525
L1
600

120
1620

M
A
Sunshade

G
150
6 7
PA 375
1200

1200
IP
L2 L3
TH
50

5
C D
1550 900
PA

200
900

L4
20 L5 12 L5 20
8 A
4
L

162 250
300
600

E F 150
K

3 100
800
500

400
2
500
400

1
300

900 (5550,4300)

170
9. Draw the section line
Command: LINE
Specify first first point : Click at 7 (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
Specify next point: Click at 7 (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
Draw arrowheads at the ends of the line using QLEADER
To draw the elevation :
10. Draw the walls
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,5500
Specify other corner point: @3800,600
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 50,6100
Specify other corner point: @3700,3720
11. Draw the sunshade
Command: LINE

M
Specify first first point : 50,8200

A
Specify next point: @-600,0
Specify next point: @0,80

G
Specify next point: @600,20
Command: MIRROR PA
Select objects: Select the sunshade
IP
Specify first point of mirror line: Click at Q (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
TH

Specify second point of mirror line: Click at N (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
Erase source objects? [Yes/No] <N>:N
PA

12. Draw the door

Command: RECTANG (R1)
Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point
L

Specify other corner point: @1000,2100

A

Command: OFFSET
K

Specify offset distance : 50

Select object to offset : Select rectangle R1
Specify point on side to offset : Click inside the rectangle
Command: RECTANG (R2)
Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point
Specify other corner point: @1200,50
MOVE rectangle R2 and place it on the top of rectangle R1 by matching mid-points.

Move the door to required place

Command: MOVE
Select objects: Select the door
Specify base point: Click at M (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
Specify second point:Click at N (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap

171
 K
A
L
PA
TH

172
IP
PA
G
A
M
13. Draw the steps
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point A
Specify other corner point: @1200,150
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the rectangle
Specify base point: Click at A (End-point of rectangle) – Use END osnap
Specify second point:Click at B (End-point of rectangle) – Use END osnap
Specify second point:Click at C (End-point of rectangle) – Use END osnap

Move the steps to required place

Command: MOVE
Select objects: Select steps
Specify base point: Click at P (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
Specify second point: Click at Q (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap
To draw the sectional view :

M
14. Draw the foundation and walls

A
Command: RECTANG

G
Specify first corner point : 5550,5500
Specify other corner point: @900,300
Command: RECTANG
PA
IP
Specify first corner point : Click at 1
TH

Specify other corner point: @500,400

Select and MOVE this rectangle 200 mm horizontally.
PA

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at 2
Specify other corner point: @400,500
L

Select and MOVE this rectangle 50 mm horizontally.

A

Command: RECTANG
K

Specify first corner point : Click at 3

Specify other corner point: @300,600
Select and MOVE this rectangle 50 mm horizontally.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at 4
Specify other corner point: @200,900
Select and MOVE this rectangle 50 mm horizontally.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at 5
Specify other corner point: @200,1200
EXPLODE this rectangle. OFFSET both vertical lines 75 mm inside.
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at 6
Specify other corner point: @200,1620

173
15. Draw the sunshade
Command: LINE
Specify first first point : Click at 7
Specify next point: @-800,0
Specify next point: @0,80
Specify next point: @600,20
Specify next point: @0,20
Specify next point: @200,0
Specify next point: C
16. Mirror the objects
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at 8
Specify other corner point: @4000,3720
Command: MIRROR
Select objects: Select the foundation, rectangles, sunshade, etc. at the left side.
Specify first point of mirror line: Click at A (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap

M
Specify second point of mirror line: Click at B (Mid-point of horizontal line) – Use MID osnap

A
Erase source objects? [Yes/No] <N>:N

G
17. Draw the weathering course and roof slab
EXPLODE all the rectangles.
Select line L1 and OFFSET 525 mm below
PA
IP
Select line L1 and OFFSET 600 mm below. EXTEND the offset line upto the outside walls
TH

Select line L1 and OFFSET 720 mm below. EXTEND the offset line upto the outside walls
18. Draw the flooring, PCC and damp proof course
PA

Select line L4 and OFFSET 12 mm below

Select line L4 and OFFSET 162 mm below.
Select line L5 and OFFSET 20 mm below.
L

19. Draw the door

A

Command: LINE
K

Specify first point: Click at C

Specify next point: @1550,0
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at D
Specify other corner point: @900,1200
Select this rectangle and OFFSET 50 mm inside
EXPLODE the offset rectangle.
Select lines L2 and L3. OFFSET both the lines 375 mm inside.
20. Draw the steps
Command: LINE
Specify first point: Click at E
Specify next point: @750,0
Specify next point: @0,150
Specify next point: @-250,0

174
 Specify next point: @0,150
Specify next point: @-250,0
Specify next point: @0,150
Specify next point: @-250,0
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at F
Specify other corner point: @800,-100
21. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands. Extend the required lines
using EXTEND command.
22. Resize the drawing to fit into A4 size for taking print out.
Command: SCALE
Select objects: ALL
Specify scale factor: 0.01 (For scale 1:100)
23. Copy and paste the entire drawing into Layout.

M
Command: COPYCLIP (Ctrl + C)
Select objects: ALL

A
Set up the paper size to A4 (297 x 210)

G
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
PA
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (297 x 210).
Paste the copied drawing into this layout
IP
Command: PASTECLIP (Ctrl + V)
TH

Specify insertion point: Click a suitable point

24. Create hatch using BHATCH command
PA

Command: BHATCH
Pick a point inside the area to hatch
Select the suitable hatch pattern and change the hatch pattern scale.
L

Create wood pattern for doors using SKETCH command.

A

25. Dimension the drawing.

K

Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.

Change the Arrowheads to Oblique.
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.
26. Add text using MTEXT command. Add notes using QLEADER command.
27. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result :
The plan, elevation and sectional view of a single storey, single room framed structure
consisting of RCC flat roof, masonry walls, lintel cum sunshade, door and windows of standard
size are drawn using CAD.

175
230
4 B K L 9 C 3

1385 X 3000

1385 X 3000
J 3000 X 3000 3000 X 3000 E

M
A
5

6690
230

G
7 8

PA
IP
I 3000 X 3000 3000 X 3000 3000 X 3000 F
TH

1 6 H G 2
PA

230
(0,0) A 6

9920
L
A

900
K

1200
500 600
s P
230 230 230
M N
Window Ventilator Door

176
Ex.No.6(C) FLOOR PLAN OF 2 BHK RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
Aim :
To draw the floor plan of 2 BHK (2 Bed rooms, Hall and Kitchen) residential building
using CAD.
Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set the drawing limits.
Command: LIMITS
Specify lower left corner: 0,0
Specify upper right corner: @12000,8000
Command: ZOOM
[All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window/Object]: ALL
3. Draw the walls
Command: RECTANG

M
Specify first corner point : 0,0

A
Specify other corner point: @9920,6690

G
Command: OFFSET
Specify offset distance : 230 PA
Select object to offset : Select the rectangle
IP
Specify point on side to offset : Click inside the rectangle
TH

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at 1
PA

Specify other corner point: @3000,3000

OFFSET the rectangle outside at a distance of 230 mm
Command: RECTANG
L

Specify first corner point : Click at 2

A

Specify other corner point: @3000,3000

K

OFFSET the rectangle outside at a distance of 230 mm

Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at 3
Specify other corner point: @3000,3000
OFFSET the rectangle outside at a distance of 230 mm
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at 4
Specify other corner point: @3000,3000
OFFSET the rectangle outside at a distance of 230 mm
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at 5
Specify other corner point: @1385,3000
OFFSET the rectangle outside at a distance of 230 mm

177
 230 230
W1 V V W1
230
D3

1385 X 3000

1385 X 3000
BATH & WC

BATH & WC
BED ROOM BED ROOM
W1 W1
3000 X 3000 3000 X 3000

M
A
D3

6690
230 D2 D2

D2 PA O
IP
LIVING ROOM DINING ROOM KITCHEN
W1 W1
TH

3000 X 3000 3000 X 3000 3000 X 3000

PA

230 D1
L

W1 W1
A

9920
K

Window (W1) - 900 mm x 1200 mm Door (D1) - 1200 mm x 2100 mm

Ventilator (V) - 600 mm x 600 mm Door (D2) - 1000 mm x 2100 mm
Door (D3) - 800 mm x 2100 mm

FLOOR PLAN OF 2 BHK RESIDENTIAL BUILDING

178
4. Draw the window
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point
Specify other corner point: @900,230
EXPLODE the rectangle
OFFSET the horizontal lines of rectangle inside at a distance of 100 mm
Draw the sunshade
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Click at S
Specify other corner point: @900,500
Select sunshade. Change linetype=HIDDEN and linetype scale = 5
5. Copy the window and sunshade to required places
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the window and sunshade
Specify base point: Click at M

M
Specify second point:Click at B (Mid-point of inner wall of room) – Use MID osnap
Specify second point: Click at C

A
Rotate the window and sunshade to -90°C

G
Command: ROTATE
PA
Select objects: Select the window and sunshade
Specify base point: Cilck at M
IP
Specify rotation angle or: -90
TH

COPY the rotated window and sunshade to required places (Points E and F)
ROTATE the window and sunshade again to -90°C
PA

COPY the rotated window and sunshade to required places (Points G and H)
ROTATE the window and sunshade again to -90°C
COPY the rotated window and sunshade to required places (Points I and J)
L

6. Draw the ventilator

A

Command: RECTANG
K

Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point

Specify other corner point: @600,230
EXPLODE the rectangle
OFFSET the horizontal lines of rectangle inside at a distance of 100 mm
7. Copy the ventilator to required places
Command: COPY
Select objects: Select the ventilator
Specify base point: Click at N
Specify second point:Click at K (Mid-point of inner wall of room) – Use MID osnap
Specify second point: Click at L
8. Draw the door D1
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick a convenient point
Specify other corner point: @1200,230

179
9. Move Door D1 to required place
Command: MOVE
Select objects: Select the door
Specify base point: Click at P
Specify second point:Click at 6 (Mid-point of inner wall of room) – Use MID osnap
10. Draw the doors D2
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick at 7 (Corner of inner wall) – Use END osnap
Specify other corner point: @-1000,230
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick at 7 (Corner of inner wall) – Use END osnap
Specify other corner point: @230,-1000
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick at 8 (Corner of inner wall) – Use END osnap
Specify other corner point: @1000,230

M
Command: RECTANG (Opening O)

A
Specify first corner point : Pick at 8 (Corner of inner wall) – Use END osnap

G
Specify other corner point: @-230,-1000
11. Draw the doors D3 PA
Command: RECTANG
IP
Specify first corner point : Pick at 5 (Corner of inner wall) – Use END osnap
TH

Specify other corner point: @-230,900

Command: RECTANG
PA

Specify first corner point : Pick at 9 (Corner of inner wall) – Use END osnap
Specify other corner point: @230,-900
12. Draw the front sunshade
L

Command: RECTANG
A

Specify first corner point : 0,0

K

Specify other corner point: @9920,-500

Select sunshade. Change linetype=HIDDEN and linetype scale = 5
13. Draw the steps
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick at 6
Specify other corner point: @1200,-250
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : Pick at 6
Specify other corner point: @1200,-500
14. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
15. Resize the drawing to fit into A4 size for taking print out.
Command: SCALE
Select objects: ALL
Specify scale factor: 0.01 (For scale 1:100)

180
16. Copy and paste the entire drawing into Layout.
Command: COPYCLIP (Ctrl + C)
Select objects: ALL
Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
Paste the copied drawing into this layout
Command: PASTECLIP (Ctrl + V)
Specify insertion point: Click a suitable point
17. Dimension the drawing.
Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.
Change the Arrowheads to Oblique
Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.
18. Add text using MTEXT command. Add notes using QLEADER command.
19. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

M
A
Result:

G
The floor plan of 2 BHK ( 2 Bed rooms, Hall and Kitchen) residential building is drawn
using CAD.
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

181
 400

40

300
1000

L5 L4

E G
600

M
(1000,3100) L6 400
D F

A
(150,3050) 50
B C 50

190
G
(0,3000)
L3 ELEVATION PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

A
2400

400
320

R1

L2
140

150

140
L1
(0,0) 150
2400

PLAN

182
Ex.No.6(D) RCC COLUMN WITH
SQUARE ISOLATED FOOTINGS
Aim :
To draw the plan and sectional elevation of a RCC column with square isolated footings
using CAD.
Procedure :
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set the drawing limits.
Command: LIMITS
Specify lower left corner: 0,0
Specify upper right corner: @4000,6000
Command: ZOOM
[All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window/Object]: ALL

M
3. Draw the plan
Command: RECTANG

A
Specify first corner point : 0,0

G
Specify other corner point: @2400,2400
Command: OFFSET PA
Specify offset distance : 150
IP
Select object to offset : Select the rectangle R1
TH

Specify point on side to offset : Click inside the rectangle

Command: OFFSET
PA

Specify offset distance : 1000

Select object to offset : Select the rectangle R1
Specify point on side to offset : Click inside the rectangle
L
A

Command: OFFSET
Specify offset distance : 1040
K

Select object to offset : Select the rectangle R1

Specify point on side to offset : Click inside the rectangle
EXPLODE the rectangles.
Command: LINE
Specify first point: Click at A
Specify next point: @566<45
MIRROR this line about a vertical centre line
MIRROR the above two lines about a horizontalcentre line
Create rectangular array
Command: ARRAYRECT
Select objects: Select line L1
Enter the number of rows : 16
Specify the distance between rows: 140
Enter the number of columns: 1

183
 400

Main column reinforcements

(4 Nos. - 25mm Dia.)
GL GL

Ties - 8mm Dia.,

300mm c/c spacing
1000

Footing main
reinforcement
600

(16 Nos. - 16mm Dia.)

400

M
190
A
G
SECTIONAL ELEVATION OF COLUMN AND FOOTINGS
PA
IP
TH
PA

Footing main
reinforcement
(16 Nos. - 16mm Dia.)
L
A
K
2400

320
400

Square column

2400
Scale - 1: 25
PLAN OF FOOTINGS All dimensions are in mm

184
 Command: ARRAYRECT
Select objects: Select line L2
Enter the number of rows : 1
Enter the number of columns: 16
Specify the distance between columns: 140
EXPLODE the arrays
4. Draw the elevation
Command: RECTANG
Specify first corner point : 0,3000
Specify other corner point: @2400,190
EXPLODE this rectangle. ERASE the upper horizontal line.
OFFSET line L3 50 mm above.
OFFSET line L3 600 mm above.
OFFSET line L3 1600 mm above.
Command: RECTANG

M
Specify first corner point : 1000,3100

A
Specify other corner point: @400,2000

G
EXPLODE this rectangle.
OFFSET lines L4 and L5 40 mm inside.
PA
Draw lines BC, DE and FG using LINE command.
IP
Create rectangular array
TH

Command: ARRAYRECT
Select objects: Select line L5
PA

Enter the number of rows : 7

Specify the distance between rows: 300
Enter the number of columns: 1
L

EXPLODE this array

A

Command: LINE
K

Specify first point: Click at C

Specify next point: @400,0
Command: LINE
Specify first point: Click at B
Specify next point: @-400,0

Draw 16 Nos. of main reinforcement

Command: DONUT
Specify inside diameter of donut: 0
Specify outside diameter of donut:16
Specify center of donut: 150,3050
Create rectangular array
Command: ARRAYRECT
Select objects: Select donnut

185
 Enter the number of columns : 16
Specify the distance between columns: 140
Enter the number of rows: 1
EXPLODE the array
Draw the breaking line at the top using LINE command
Draw the symbol for GL (Ground Level) using LINE command
5. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
6. Resize the drawing to fit into A4 size for taking print out.
Command: SCALE
Select objects: ALL
Specify scale factor: 0.025 (For scale 1:40)
7. Copy and paste the entire drawing into Layout.
Command: COPYCLIP (Ctrl + C)
Select objects: ALL
Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)

M
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.

A
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).

G
Paste the copied drawing into this layout
Command: PASTECLIP (Ctrl + V) PA
Specify insertion point: Click a suitable point
IP
8. Dimension the drawing.
TH

Modify the dimension style using DDIM command.

Change the Arrowheads to Oblique
PA

Dimension the horizontal and vertical lines using DIMLIN command.

9. Add text using MTEXT command. Add notes using QLEADER command.
L

10. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

A
K

Result :
The plan and sectional elevation of a RCC column with square isolated footings are
drawn using CAD.

186
 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING FOR
EEE & ALLIED COURSES
Ex.No.6(A) STAIRCASE WIRING ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT
Aim :
To draw the staircase wiring electrical circuit using CAD.

Procedure :
(Note : Refer theory portion for detailed procedure to draw the symbols)

1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.

2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).

M
3. Set Lineweight= 0.3mm

A
G
4. Draw switch board (SB1) using RECTANG command. EXPLODE the rectangle. Draw a

5.
horizontal LINE joining midpoints.
PA
Draw SPDT switch (S1) using CIRCLE, LINE, ROTATE and COPY commands. [Fig.1]
IP
6. Draw a horizontal LINE AB of suitable length (10mm).
TH

7. Select SB1 and S1. MIRROR about a vertical line (L1) through the midpoint of line AB. [Fig.2]
8. Select S2 and rectangle. MIRROR about line L2. [Fig.3]
PA

9. Draw a horizontal LINE CD of suitable length (10mm).

10. Select SB1, SB2, S1, S2 and S3. MIRROR about line L3. [Fig.4]
L

11. Draw a horizontal line L4 of suitable length. Create four parallel lines at equal distance (3mm)
A

between them using OFFSET command.

K

12. Draw vertical lines in SB1 as shown in Fig.5. Use QUAdrant and PERpendicular osnaps.
Create other vertical lines using MIRROR and COPY commands.
13. Draw light bulb (L1) using CIRCLE and LINE commands.
14. Draw vertical lines from L1 as shown in Fig.6. Use ENDpoint and PERpendicular osnaps.
Make two more copies of L1 and vertical lines using COPY command. Create L2 and L3.
15. Draw connection symbol at required points using DONUT command.
16. Draw no-connection symbol at required points using CIRCLE and TRIM commnds.
17. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
18. Add text using MTEXT command.
19. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result :
The staircase wiring electrical circuit is drawn using CAD.

187
 STAIRCASE WIRING ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

S1 S1 S2 S1 S2 S3
A B
SB1 SB1 L1 SB1 SB2 L2
Fig.1 Fig.2 Fig.3

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
C D
SB1 SB2 L3 SB3 SB4
Fig.4

M
A
G
L4 PA
IP
TH

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6

SB1 SB2 SB3 SB4

PA

Fig.5

L1 L2 L3
L
A
K

1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
C D
S
SB2 SB3 SB4
SB1 Fig.6

188
 .

STAIRCASE WIRING ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT

L1 L2 L3

M
A
G
N
PA
IP
P
TH
PA
L

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
A

SB1 SB2 SB3 SB 4

K

N - Neutral
P - Phase
SB - Switch Board
S - Switch
L - Light Bulb

189
 CONTROL AND MAIN CIRCUIT FOR
AUTOMATIC STAR DELTA STARTER

R R Y B

TPSTS TPSTS

5A 5A FUSE

M
START

A
T1
STOP
D4

G
S
OLR PAOLR
S4

M4
IP
M
TH

M1 M1 M2 M3
L1
PA

ON - DELAY
T
A1 A1 B1 C1
STATOR

STATOR

D1 D1 D2 D3
A

S5
D
K

A2 A2 B2 C2
S1 S1 S2 S3
Fig.3

Fig.1 Fig.2

ROTOR

Fig.4

190
Ex.No.6(B) CONTROL AND MAIN CIRCUIT FOR
AUTOMATIC STAR DELTA STARTER
Aim :
To draw the control and main circuit for automatic star delta starter using CAD.

Procedure :
(Note : Refer theory portion for detailed procedure to draw the symbols)

1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.

2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Set Lineweight= 0.3mm
4. Draw the required symbols and arrange them as shown in Fig.1.

M
Draw the TPST Switch using LINE and CIRCLE commands.

A
Draw the Fuse (5A) using LINE and CIRCLE commands.

G
Draw the OLR (Over Load Relay) using LINE and CIRCLE commands.
PA
Draw the contactor M1 using LINE and CIRCLE commands. Change the Lineweight
of Line L1 to 0.5mm.
IP
Draw the stator winding (A1-A2) using CIRCLE, COPY, TRIM and LINE commands.
TH

Make two copies of contactor M1 and create contactors D1 & S1. Use COPY command.
Move and place all the symbols in position using MOVE command. Use suitable
PA

osnaps (Endpoint, Centerpoint, etc.) to accurately pick the points.

5. Select all the symbols in Fig.1 and make two copies using COPY command. Draw
required connection lines using LINE command as shown in Fig.2.
L
A

6. Draw a RECANGLE by enclosing the OLRs. Select the rectangle. Change Linetype =
K

HIDDEN and Linetype scale = 5.

7. Draw the required symbols and arrange them as shown in Fig.3.
Draw the STOP Push button using LINE and CIRCLE commands.
COPY the STOP Push button. MOVE the horizontal line 0.5mm above the circles to
create START Push button.
Draw the Push button with delay (T1) using LINE, CIRCLE and ARC commands.
COPY contactor M1 and ROTATE it through -90° to create contactor M4.
MIRROR contactor M4 horizontally to create contactor D4.
COPY contactor S1 and create contactor S4. MOVE the horizontal line to touch the circles.
COPY contactor D4 and create contactor S5.
Draw a rectangle. Add text ‘S’ in the middle of rectangle using MTEXT.
Make three copies of rectangle and text using COPY command.
Move and place all the symbols in position using MOVE command as shown in Fig.3.
Use suitable osnaps (Endpoint, Centerpoint, etc.) to accurately pick the points.

191
 CONTROL AND MAIN CIRCUIT FOR
AUTOMATIC STAR DELTA STARTER

3 Phase, 440 V - AC Supply

R Y B

TPST
Switch

5A FUSE

M
A
START

G
T1
STOP
D4
PA S
S4
IP

OLR
TH

M4
M
PA

M1 M2 M3
L

ON - DELAY
A

T
K

A1 B1 C1
STATOR

D1 D2 D3
S5
D
A2 B2 C2
S1 S2 S3
TPST - Three Pole, Single Throw
OLR - Over Load Relay
M - Main contactor
S - Star contactor
D - Delta contactor
ROTOR T - Timer

192
8. Draw required connection lines using LINE command as shown in Fig.3.
9. Draw the ROTOR using CIRCLE and ARRAYPOLAR commands as shown in Fig.4. Move
and place the rotor to suitable place using MOVE command.
10. Draw connection symbol at required points using DONUT command.
11. Draw no-connection symbol at required points using CIRCLE and TRIM commnds.
12. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
13. Add text using MTEXT command.
14. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result :
The control and main circuit for automatic star delta starter is drawn using CAD.

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

193
 CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR JOGGING
IN CAGE INDUCTION MOTOR

R R Y B

TPSTS TPSTS

5A 5A FUSE

M
A
START

G
JR
M1 M1 M2 M3
PA M4 JR1
IP

OLR STOP JOG

TH

OLR
M
OLR
PA

JR2
STATOR

Fig.3
STATOR

L
A
K

Fig.1 Fig.2

ROTOR

Fig.4

194
Ex.No.6(C) CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR JOGGING
IN CAGE INDUCTION MOTOR
Aim :
To draw the control circuit for jogging in cage induction motor using CAD.

Procedure :
(Note : Refer theory portion for detailed procedure to draw the symbols)

1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.

2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Set Lineweight= 0.3mm
4. Draw the required symbols and arrange them as shown in Fig.1.

M
Draw the TPST Switch using LINE and CIRCLE commands.

A
Draw the Fuse (5A) using LINE and CIRCLE commands.

G
Draw the contactor M1 using LINE command.
PA
Draw the OLR (Over Load Relay) using LINE and CIRCLE commands.
Draw the stator winding using CIRCLE, COPY, TRIM and LINE commands.
IP
Move and place all the symbols in position using MOVE command. Use suitable
TH

osnaps (Endpoint, Centerpoint, etc.) to accurately pick the points.

5. Select all the symbols in Fig.1 and make two copies using COPY command. Draw
PA

required connection lines using LINE command as shown in Fig.2.

6. Draw a RECANGLE by enclosing the OLRs. Select the rectangle. Change Linetype =
HIDDEN and Linetype scale = 5.
L
A

7. Draw the required symbols and arrange them as shown in Fig.3.

K

Draw the STOP Push button using LINE and CIRCLE commands.
COPY the STOP Push button. MOVE the horizontal line 0.5mm above the circles to
create START Push button.
COPY contactor M1 and ROTATE it through 90° to create contactor M4.
COPY contactor M4 and create contactor JR1.
Create Jog Relay symbol using CIRCLE and MTEXT command.
COPY the OLR and ROTATE it through -90° to create another OLR.
COPY START Push button and create JOG Push button.
COPY contactor JR1 and create contactor JR2.
Create Motor symbol using CIRCLE and MTEXT command.
Move and place all the symbols in position using MOVE command as shown in Fig.3.
Use suitable osnaps (Endpoint, Centerpoint, etc.) to accurately pick the points.

195
 CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR JOGGING
IN CAGE INDUCTION MOTOR

3 Phase, 440 V - AC Supply

R Y B

TPST
Switch

5A FUSE

M
A
G
PA START
JR
IP
M1 M2 M3
TH

M4 JR1
PA

STOP JOG
OLR
M
OLR
L
A

JR2
K
STATOR

TPST - Three Pole, Single Throw

OLR - Over Load Relay
M - Main contactor, Motor
JR - Jog Relay

ROTOR

196
8. Draw required connection lines using LINE command.
9. Draw the ROTOR using CIRCLE and ARRAYPOLAR commands as shown in Fig.4. Move
and place the rotor to suitable place using MOVE command.
10. Draw connection symbol at required points using DONUT command.
11. Draw no-connection symbol at required points using CIRCLE and TRIM commnds.
12. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
13. Add text using MTEXT command.
14. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result :
The control circuit for jogging in cage induction motor is drawn using CAD.

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

197
 SINGLE PHASE WIRING CIRCUIT

Sub Circuit-1

Sub Circuit-2

Sub Circuit-3
M

To Motor
A
G
Indicator
Lamp
PA
IP
Energy Meter
TH

ICDP
Switch 6A
SP
PA

MCP
L

20A DP
A

MCP
Phase
K

From O.H Line Cut-out Earth

Distribution
Fig.2 Fig.3 Fig.4 Board
Neutral
Fig.1

198
Ex.No.6(D) SINGLE PHASE WIRING CIRCUIT
Aim :
To draw the single phase wiring circuit using CAD.

Procedure :
(Note : Refer theory portion for detailed procedure to draw the symbols)

1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.

2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Set Lineweight= 0.3mm
4. Draw the energy meter as shown in Fig.1.
Draw a RECTANGLE. FILLET the upper and lower side of the rectangle,

M
Make 3 copies of this rectangle at equal interval. Use COPY command.

A
Draw required connection lines using LINE command as shown in Fig.3.

G
5. Draw a RECANGLE by enclosing the energy meter. Select the rectangle. Change

6.
Linetype = HIDDEN and Linetype scale = 5.
Draw the cut-out as shown in Fig.2.
PA
IP
Draw the fuse using CIRCLE and LINE Commands.
TH

Draw a RECANGLE by enclosing the fuse. Select the rectangle. Change Linetype =
HIDDEN and Linetype scale = 5.
PA

7. Draw the ICDP Switch as shown Fig.3.

Make 2 copies of fuse and arrange them as shown in Fig.3.
Draw a SPST switch using LINE and CIRCLE command.
L

Draw a RECANGLE by enclosing the ICDP Switch. Select the rectangle. Change
A

Linetype = HIDDEN and Linetype scale = 5.

K

8. Draw the indicator lamp using CIRCLE and LINE commands.

9. Draw the required symbols and arrange them as shown in Fig.4.
Draw a MCB using LINE, CIRCLE and ARC commands.
Make 5 copies of this MCB and arrange them at required places. Use COPY and MOVE
commands.
Draw a RECANGLE by enclosing the 20A DP MCB. Select the rectangle. Change
Linetype = HIDDEN and Linetype scale = 5.
Draw a RECTANGLE. Create the text “Sub circuit - 1” using MTEXT command. ROTATE
the text through 90°. Center align the text inside the rectangle.
Make 3 copies of this rectangle along with the text at equal intervals. Edit the text as
required.
Move and place all the symbols in position using MOVE command as shown in Fig.4.
Use suitable osnaps (Endpoint, Centerpoint, etc.) to accurately pick the points.

199
 SINGLE PHASE WIRING CIRCUIT

M
PASub Circuit-1

Sub Circuit-2

Sub Circuit-3

To Motor
A
G
Indicator
Lamp
IP
Energy Meter
TH

ICDP

Neutral
Switch 6A
PA

SP
MCP
Phase
L
A

20A DP
MCP
K

Phase

From O.H Line Cut-out Earth

Distribution
Board
Neutral
O.H Line - Over Head Line
ICDP - Iron Clad, Double Pole
SP - Single Pole
DP - Double Pole
MCB - Miniature Breaking Circuit

200
10. Draw a RECANGLE by enclosing 6 MCBs to represent Distribution Board. Select the
rectangle. Change Linetype = HIDDEN and Linetype scale = 5.
11. Draw the Earth symbol using LINE, COPY and SCALE commands.
12. Draw required connection lines using LINE command.
13. Draw connection symbol at required points using DONUT command.
14. Draw no-connection symbol at required points using CIRCLE and TRIM commnds.
15. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
16. Add text using MTEXT command.
17. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result :
The single phase wiring circuit is drawn using CAD.

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

201
 HALF WAVE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT

30 10 Diode 10

AC DC
40

Load

M
Input Output

A
G
A
PA B
R1
IP
Transformer R2 R3
Fig.1
TH
PA

Diode
L
A
K

AC DC
Input Load Output

Transformer

Fig.2

202
 COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING FOR
ECE, COMPUTER ENGINEERING &
ALLIED COURSES

Ex.No.6(A) HALF WAVE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT

Aim :
To draw the half wave rectifier electronics circuit using CAD.

Procedure :
(Note : Refer theory portion for detailed procedure to draw the symbols)

1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.

2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)

M
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.

A
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).

G
3. Set Lineweight= 0.3mm
4.
PA
Draw a RECTANGLE (R1) of 30mm width and 40mm height.
IP
5. COPY the rectangle R1 and place it 10mm horizontally away from it.
TH

6. Draw another RECTANGLE (R3) of 10mm width and 40mm height with first corner at B.
7. Draw the transformer using CIRCLE, COPY, LINE and TRIM commands.
PA

8. Draw the diode symbol using POLYGON and LINE commands.

9. Draw resistor (load) symbol using LINE, MIRROR, COPY and TRIM commands.
L

10. Move and place the symbols in position using MOVE command as shown in Fig.1. Use
A

suitable osnaps (Endpoint, Midpoint, Centerpoint, etc.) to accurately pick the points.
K

11. Draw connection symbol at required points using DONUT command.

12. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
13. Add text using MTEXT command.
14. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result :
The half wave rectifier electronics circuit is drawn using CAD.

203
 BRIDGE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT

°
45
D4

te
ta
Ro
30 10 40

Ro
Diode

tat
e-
D4 D1

45
D1

°
10
L1
AC
40

Input L2

D2 D3
DC

M
Load

30
Output

A
A B

G
R1 R2
Transformer
PA 60 C
R4
R3
IP
Fig.1
TH
PA
L
A

D4 D1
K

AC
Input

D2 D3 DC
Load Output

Transformer

Fig.2

204
Ex.No.6(B) BRIDGE RECTIFIER CIRCUIT
Aim :
To draw the bridge rectifier circuit using CAD.
Procedure :
(Note : Refer theory portion for detailed procedure to draw the symbols)

1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.

2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Set Lineweight= 0.3mm
4. Draw a RECTANGLE (R1) of 30mm width and 40mm height with first corner at A.
5. Draw a RECTANGLE (R2) of 40mm width and 40mm height with first corner at B. MOVE
the rectangle R2 10mm horizontally away from R1.

M
6. Draw a LINE (L2) of 40mm length. MOVE and place the line L2 so that the midpoints of L1

A
and L2 coincide.

G
7. Draw a square using LINE command by joining the end points of lines L1 and L2.
8. PA
Draw the transformer using CIRCLE, COPY, LINE and TRIM commands.
IP
9. Draw the diode symbol using POLYGON and LINE commands.
10. ROTATE the diode symbol through -45° to create D1.
TH

11. ROTATE the diode symbol through 45° to create D4.

PA

12. MOVE and place D1 and D4 at the midponts of lines as shown in Fig.1.
13. MIRROR D1 and D4 about the horizontal line L2. Create D2 and D3.
L

14. Draw a RECTANGLE (R3) of 60mm width and 30mm height. MOVE and place this rectangle
A

so that the midpint of upper horizontal line and midpoint of L2 coincide.

K

15. Draw a RECTANGLE (R4) of 10mm width and 30mm height with first coner at C.
16. Draw resistor (load) symbol using LINE, MIRROR, COPY and TRIM commands.
17. Draw connection lines using LINE command.
18. Draw earth symbol using LINE, COPY and SCALE commands.
19. Draw connection symbol at required points using DONUT command.
20. Draw no-connection symbol at required points using CIRCLE and TRIM commands.
21. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
22. Add text using MTEXT command.
23. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result :
The bridge rectifier circuit is drawn using CAD.

205
 COMMON EMITTER AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT

D +V cc
L3
R1 RL R1 RL

L2

VOut
B
C1 C1
A A F
L1

L4

Fig.1 Vin

R2 RE

M
C2

A
0v
G

G
L5

PA Fig.2
IP

+V cc
TH

R1 RL
PA

IC
L

VOut
A
K

C1
IB

IE
Vin

R2 RE C2

0v

Fig.3

206
Ex.No.6(C) COMMON EMITTER AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT
Aim :
To draw the common emitter amplifier circuit using CAD.
Procedure :
(Note : Refer theory portion for detailed procedure to draw the symbols)
1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.
2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Set Lineweight= 0.3mm
4. Draw the BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor) using LINE, CIRCLE and MIRROR commands.
5. Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) of length 30mm from A.
6. Draw a vertical LINE (L2) of length 25mm from B.

M
7. Draw resistor (RL) using LINE, MIRROR, COPY and TRIM commands. MOVE and place
RL on L1 at suitable point.

A
8. Select and COPY L2 and RL at a distance of 20mm leftwards. EXTEND the line to meet L1.

G
9. Draw the capacitor (C1) using LINE command. MOVE and place C1 on L1 at suitable point.
PA
10. Draw a horizontal LINE (L3) of length 40mm from D.
IP
11. Select L2, L3, R1 and RL. MIRROR about horizontal line L1.
12. COPY L3 and place it at a distance of 5mm from B.
TH

13. COPY C1 and ROTATE it through -90°. MOVE and place it at the right side of RE.
PA

14. Draw a vertical line (L4) of length 35mm from F.

15. Draw a horizontal line (L5) of length 20 mm from G.
16. Add arrowheads using QLEADER command.
L
A

17. Draw connection lines using LINE command.

K

18. Draw earth symbol using LINE, COPY and SCALE commands.
19. Draw connection symbol at required points using DONUT command.
20. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
21. Add text using MTEXT command.
22. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result :
The common emitter amplifier circuit is drawn using CAD.

207
 FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT

80

110 ohms
(Thermistor)
Buzzer
Switch
L2
A R1
BC 548 (3.3 K)

60
+
9V L1
Battery B

M
_

A
4.7V
Zener Diode

G
L4
R2
L3
PA (100 ohms)
IP
R1
Fig.1
TH
PA

110 ohms
(Thermistor)
L

Buzzer
A

Switch
K

R1
(3.3 K)
BC 548
+ 9V
Battery
_

Zener Diode 4.7V

R2
(100 ohms)

Fig.2

208
Ex.No.6(D) FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT
Aim :
To draw the fire alarm circuit using CAD.
Procedure :
(Note : Refer theory portion for detailed procedure to draw the symbols)

1. Open AutoCAD application software and create a New Drawing File.

2. Set up the paper size to A4 (210 x 297)
Right click on Layout1 tab and select Page Setup Manager.
Choose Modify from the Dialogue box and select Paper size as ISO A4 (210 x 297).
3. Set Lineweight= 0.3mm
4. Draw a RECTANGLE (R1) of width 80mm and height 60mm.
5. Draw a horizontal LINE (L1) joining midpoints of vertical lines of rectangle.
6. Draw the BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor - BC 548) on line L1 using LINE, CIRCLE and

M
MIRROR commands.

A
7. Draw a vertical LINE (L2) from A. Draw a vertical LINE (L3) from B.

G
8. Draw resistor (R1) using LINE, MIRROR, COPY and TRIM commands. MOVE and place

9.
R1 on L1 at suitable point. PA
Make two copies of R1 and place them as shown in fig.1 to create R2 and thermistor.
IP
10. Draw buzzer on line L2 using CIRCLE, LINE and TRIM commands.
TH

11. Draw zener diode on line L3 using POLYGON and LINE commands.
12. Draw the switch on line L4 using LINE, CIRCLE, ROTATE and TRIM commands.
PA

13. Draw the battery on line L4 using LINE, COPY and SCALE commands.
14. Add arrowheads using QLEADER command.
L

15. Draw connection lines using LINE command.

A

16. Draw connection symbol at required points using DONUT command.

K

17. Remove the unwanted lines using TRIM and ERASE commands.
18. Add text using MTEXT command.
19. Take printout of the drawing using PLOT command.

Result :
The fire alarm circuit is drawn using CAD.

209
K
A
L
PA
TH
IP
PA
G
A
M
SHORT QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS (ENGLISH)
Unit – I : BASICS OF DRAWING AND DIMENSIONING
1) Why engineering drawing is called language of engineers?
By means of drawing, the shape, size, finish, colour, and construction of any object can be
described accurately and clearly. Drawing is a way for communicating engineer’s ideas,
designs, and thoughts to others. Hence it is called as language of engineers.
2) What is BIS?
BIS stands for Bureau of Indian Standards. It prescribes the standards to be used in various
engineering applications.
3) Write the IS codes recommended by BIS for engineering drawing.
IS code Name of the drawing subject
IS 9609 – 1983 English lettering

M
IS 10711 – 1983 Size of drawing sheet

A
IS 10713 – 1983 Scales for technical drawings

G
IS 10714 – 1983 General principle of presentation

PA
IS 11664 – 1983 Folding of drawing prints
IS 11665 – 1985 Title block
IP
IS 11669 – 1986 General principle of dimensioning
TH

4) Mention any four drawing instruments.

1) Drawing board 2) Mini drafter 3) Protractor 4) Compass
PA

5) What is the material used for making drawing board?

Drawing board is made of strips of well seasoned soft wood such as oak or pine.
L

6) What is the use of battens in drawing board?

A

The strips in a drawing board are joined together by two battens at the back to prevent
K

warping.
7) What is the use of ebony edge in drawing board?
T–square head is made to slide against the ebony edge.
8) What is the purpose of providing saw cut in ebony edge?
The ebony edge has a saw cut along its length to prevent contraction and expansion due to
atmospheric changes.
9) Mention the standard sizes of drawing boards recommended by BIS.
Board size in mm
Designation
Length x Width x Thickness
D0 1500 x 1000 x 25
D1 1000 x 700 x 25
D2 700 x 500 x 15
D3 500 x 350 x 15

210
10) Name the main parts of T-square.
1) Stock 2) Blade
11) Mention the use of T-square.
T–square is mainly used to draw horizontal lines. Set–squares may be made to slide over
the working edge of the T–square to draw perpendicular, parallel and inclined lines.
12) State the material used for making set - squares.
The set–squares or triangles are made of wood, transparent celluloid or plastic.
13) What are the two forms of set-squares?
The two forms of set–squares are 45o set–square and 30o– 60o set–square.
14) Write the uses of set-squares.
Set–squares are used to draw all straight lines. Vertical lines can be drawn by using set–
squares along with the T–square. Lines with an angle of 15o, 30o, 45o, 60o, 75o, 105o, etc.
can be drawn with the combination of T–square and set–squares.
15) What is clinograph? State its uses.

M
Clinograph is an adjustable set–square. It is used to draw parallel lines at any inclination.

A
16) Mention the material used for making protractor.

G
Protractor is made of wood, tin, celluloid or transparent plastics.
17) What is the use of protractor? PA
Protractor is used to measure or draw angles which cannot be drawn by set–squares. It is
IP
also used to divide the circle into a number of equal parts.
TH

18) Write the uses of scales.

Scales are used for transferring and measuring distances or lengths on a drawing.
PA

19) What are french curves?

French curves are used to draw curves and other than circular arcs, which cannot be drawn
L

with a compass.
A

20) List out the instruments available in an instrument box.

K

1) Large size compass 2) Lengthening bar 3) Small bow compass

4) Large size divider 5) Small bow divider 6)Inking pen
21) What is the use of large size compass?
Large size compass is used for drawing circles and arcs of circles. Circles up to 120mm
diameter can be drawn with the legs of the compass kept straight.
22) Why the needle is kept longer than the lead point in compass?
The needle is kept longer than the lead point, because the needle is required to be inserted
slightly inside the paper.
23) What is the use of lengthening bar?
Circles more than 150mm radius are drawn with the help of the lengthening bar.
24) What is the use of small bow compass?
Small bow compass is used for drawing circles and arcs of less than 25mm radius. It is
particularly used to draw a large number of small circles of the same diameter.

211
25) List out the uses of large size divider.
To divide curves or straight lines into required number of equal parts
To transfer dimension from one part of the drawing to another part
To set–off given dimension from the scale to the drawing.
26) Mention the uses of small bow divider.
Small bow divider is used for making minute divisions and large number of equal distances.
27) What is the use of small bow ink pen?
Small bow ink pen is used for drawing small circles and arcs in ink.
28) What is the use of inking pen?
Inking pen is used for drawing straight lines and non–circular arcs in ink.
29) What are the standard sizes of drawing papers recommended by BIS?
Sheet Designation Width x Length (mm)
A0 841 x 1189
A1 594 x 841

M
A2 420 x 594

A
A3 297 x 420

G
A4 210 x 297
A5 PA 148 x 210
30) What is the ratio of length and width of a drawing paper?
IP

The ratio of length and width of a drawing paper is 1: √2.

TH

31) What is the surface area of A0 size paper?

Surface area of A0 size is one square meter.
PA

32) Mention the ratio of areas of two successive sizes of paper.

The areas of the two successive sizes of paper are in the ratio 1:2.
L

33) What are the different grades of pencils?

A

H, 2H, 3H, … 9H – Hard grade pencils

K

HB – Medium grade pencils

B, 2B, 3B, … 7B – Soft grade pencils
34) List out the uses of different grade pencils.
Pencil grade Uses
3H pencil Guide lines for lettering.
2H pencil Construction lines, dimension lines, leader lines, section lines, and centre lines.
H pencil Object lines, lettering and dimensioning.
HB pencil Free hand sketching, arrow heads, dimensioning and lettering.

35) Mention the two different shapes of pencil lead and give its applications.
Conical point: It is used in sketch works, lettering, etc.
Chisel edge: It is used for drawing lines of uniform thickness and hence it is suitable
for drawing work.

212
36) What is the use of pencil eraser?
The eraser made of soft India rubber is mostly used for pencil drawings. Eraser is used to
remove the unwanted lines and lines drawn by mistake.
37) List out the paper fasteners used in drawing.
Drawing pins, adhesive tapes or spring clips are generally used for fixing the drawing
sheet on the drawing board.
38) What is the use of duster?
Duster is used for cleaning the mini–drafter, set–square and other instruments and the
surface of the drawing sheet before starting the work and also during the work.
39) What is mini-drafter?
Mini–drafter is a miniature form of drafting machine. The uses and advantages of the
T–square, set–squares, scales and the protractor are combined in the mini–drafter.
40) Write the uses of mini-drafter?
Mini–drafter can be used to draw horizontal, vertical, inclined, parallel, and perpendicular lines

M
of required length anywhere on the sheet easily. It considerably reduces the drafting time.

A
41) Define lettering.

G
Writing of titles, sub–titles, bill of materials, dimensions, notes, and other important

PA
particulars on a drawing is known as lettering.
42) Give the importance of legible lettering.
IP
Poor lettering spoils the appearance and the usefulness of the drawing. Therefore, in an
engineering drawing, lettering should be legible, clear, and uniform.
TH

43) What are single stroke letters?

PA

When the thickness of the lines of the letters is obtained in one stroke of the pencil, then
they are called single stroke letters.
44) What are the two types of single stroke letters?
L

The two types of single stroke letters are: (i) Vertical letters (ii) Inclined letters.
A

The lines of inclined letters are drawn at an inclination of 75o with the horizontal.
K

45) Give the approximate height : width ratio of letters and numerals.
Letters Height : Width
TOM – Q – VAXY 6:6
W 6:8
1&I 6:1
All other letters and numerals 6:5

46) List out the the recommended height of letters for various purposes.
Description Height of letters
Drawing number in title block
10mm to 12mm
and letters denoting cutting plane section
Main title of drawing 6mm to 8mm
Sub–titles 3mm to 6mm
Notes and dimension figures 3mm to 5mm

213
47) What is scaling of drawings?
While preparing drawings, the objects cannot always be shown to their full size. The
drawings of objects are frequently drawn smaller or larger than the actual sizes for the clear
interpretation and handling convenience. It is known as scaling of drawings.
48) What are the different types of scaling used in drawings?
Full scale: The drawings are drawn to the same size of objects.
Reducing scale: The drawings are drawn smaller than the actual size of the objects.
Enlarging scale: The drawings are drawn larger than the actual size of the objects.
49) List out the scales recommended by BIS.
Full scale: 1:1
Reducing scales: 1:2, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20, 1:50, 1:100, 1:200, 1:500
Enlarging scales: 50:1, 20:1, 10:1, 5:1, 2:1
50) Define dimensioning.
Dimensioning is the process of indicating the sizes and other descriptions on a drawing
using lines, figures, letters, symbols, and notes.

M
51) Give the IS codes for dimensioning of drawings.

A
Dimensioning of drawings should be done as per the specifications given in IS:11669–1986

G
(General principles of dimensioning) and IS:10718–1983 (Methods of dimensioning and
tolerance codes) PA
52) What are object lines or outlines?
IP
Object lines or outlines are thick continuous lines drawn to represent visible edges, surfaces
TH

and surface boundaries of objects.

53) What is extension line?
PA

An extension line is a thin continuous line drawn in extension of an outline. It should be

extended by about 2mm beyond the dimension line.
L

54) How notes are written?

A

A note gives information regarding specific operation relating to a feature. It should be

K

always written horizontally.

55) What is leader line? How it is drawn?
Leader line is a thin continuous line connecting a note or a dimension figure. Leader line
should terminate with a dot if it ends within outlines of an object. It should terminate with
an arrowhead if it ends on the outline of an object. It should terminate without dot or
arrowhead if it ends on a dimension line.
56) How dimension lines are terminated?
Dimension lines are terminated by arrowheads, oblique strokes or an origin indication.
57) How arrowhead is drawn?
Arrowhead is placed at each end of a dimension line. The length of the arrowhead should
be about three times its maximum width. The arrowhead may be open, closed or closed
and filled.
58) How oblique stroke is drawn?
Oblique stroke is drawn as a short line inclined at 45o

214
59) What is origin indication?
Origin indication is drawn as a small open circle of approximately 3mm diameter.
60) What is aligned system of dimensioning?
In this method, the dimension is placed parallel to the dimension line in such a way that it
may be read from the bottom edge or the right–hand edge of the drawing sheet. The
dimensions should be placed near the middle and above the dimension line.
61) What is uni-directional system of dimensioning?
In this method, all the dimensions are placed in such a way that they can be read from the
bottom of the edge of the drawing sheet. The dimension lines may be broken near the
middle for inserting the dimension.
62) What is continuous or chain dimensioning?
In this method, dimensions are arranged in a straight line. The first extension line of the
succeeding dimension will be the second extension line of the preceding dimension.
63) What is parallel or baseline dimensioning?

M
In this method, a number of dimensions are indicated from a common datum. The
dimension lines are placed parallel to one another.

A
64) How progressive dimensioning is done?

G
PA
In this method, the datum line is indicated by an origin indication (or a dot) and the zero
sign. The dimensions are placed progressively from the datum.
IP
65) What is coordinate dimensioning?
In this method the coordinate values and sizes of various features in a drawing are separately
TH

tabulated. It results in a neat and clear presentation of drawing.

66) How circle is dimensioned?
PA

A circle is dimensioned by specifying its diameter value. The dimension should always be
preceded by the symbol φ.
L

67) How arc is dimensioned?

A

An arc is dimensioned by specifying its radius value. The dimension should always be
K

preceded by the letter R. Dimension line for the radius should pass through the centre of
the arc and terminated with only one arrowhead.
68) How holes are dimensioned?
Hole sizes are dimensioned with their diameters along with the depth of the hole.
69) Sketch the methods of dimensioning chamfers.

30°

3 2 x 45° 2 x 45°

(a)(b) (c)

215
70) Sketch the methods of dimensioning angles.

12
0°
45°

60° 60°

71) Sketch the methods of dimensioning chord and arcs.

33 60° 36

Chord Angle Arc length

M
72) Sketch the methods of dimensioning bent parts.

A
32

G
16
50

150°PA R3 R3
IP

13
3 3
TH

50
PA

73) Sketch the methods of dimensioning tapers.

30 30 30
L
A

15°
K
Ø40

Ø40

Ø20

Ø20

Taper 1:4

74) Sketch the methods of dimensioning counter sunk holes.

Ø14

Ø20

Ø14

90°

3 3

216
75) How the spherical surfaces are dimensioned?
The radius and diameter dimension of a spherical surface should be preceded by the letter
SR and Sφ respectively.
76) List out any four dimensioning rules.
Dimensions should be placed outside the views
Larger dimensions should be placed outside shorter one
Crossing of dimension lines should be avoided.
An overall dimension should be placed outside a series of smaller dimensions.
Dimensions are to be given from the visible outlines rather than from hidden lines.
An axis line or outline should never be used as dimension line
Holes should be dimensioned in the view in which they appear as circles.
Same dimension of an object should not be repeated in different views.
Notes should always be written horizontally.

M
Unit – II : GEOMETRIC CONSTRUCTIONS AND

A
G
CONSTRUCTION OF POLYGONS
1) What is triangle? PA
A triangle is a plane figure bounded by three straight lines and the sum of the interior angles
IP
is always 180°.
TH

2) List out the different types of triangles.

Equilateral triangle: All sides equal and all angles equal.
PA

Isosceles triangle: Two sides equal and two angles equal.

Scalene triangle: No sides equal and no angles equal.
Right angle triangle: Any one angle 90°.
L
A

3) What is a quadrilateral?
K

A quadrilateral is a plane figure bounded by four straight lines.

4) What is parallelogram?
If the opposite sides are parallel, the quadrilateral is called a parallelogram.
5) List out the different types of quadrilaterals.
Square: All sides equal, adjacent sides perpendicular.
Rectangle: Opposite sides equal, adjacent sides perpendicular.
Rhombus: All sides equal, opposite sides parallel and opposite angles equal.
Rhomboid: Opposite sides parallel and equal, opposite angles equal.
Trapezium: Two sides parallel.
6) Define polygon.
A plane figure bounded by a number of straight lines is called a polygon.
7) What is regular polygon?
If the polygon has equal sides and equal angles, it is known as regular polygon.

217
8) List out the different types of polygons.
a) Triangle : 3 sides b) Square : 4 sides
c) Pentagon : 5 sides d) Hexagon : 6 sides
e) Heptagon : 7 sides f) Octagon : 8 sides
g) Nonagon : 9 sides h) Decagon : 10 sides
i) Dodecagon : 12 sides

Unit – III : BASICS OF COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN

1) What is AutoCAD?
AutoCAD is an application software developed by the company Autodesk Inc., USA. It is
one of the worldwide standard for generating various kinds of drawing.
2) List out the applications of AutoCAD.
It is used by civil engineers in the design of buildings, dams, arches, etc.
It is used by mechanical engineers in the design of machine parts, assembly,
automobile components, consumer products, etc.

M
It is used by electronics engineer in the design of PCBs.

A
It is used by electrical engineers in the design of electrical wiring circuits.

G
It is used by art directors in the film industry for generating 3D models, etc.

1)
PA
3) What are the advantages of AutoCAD? (or) What is the need for AutoCAD?
Drawings can be created very easily and quickly.
IP
2) Accurate and high precise drawings can be created.
3) Existing drawings can be edited and modified easily.
TH

4) Dimensioning of drawings can be done easily.

5) Storage and retrieval of drawings are very easy.
PA

6) Drawing office productivity is increased considerably.

4) How do you start AutoCAD in Windows?
L

1) By double clicking on the AutoCAD icon in the Windows desktop (or)

A

2) Click Start button ➤ All Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD2010

K

5) What are the methods used to execute an AutoCAD command?

AutoCAD provides the following methods to execute commands.
1) Keyboard 2) Panels 3) Pull down menu
6) What is the use of Command: prompt in AutoCAD?
Any AutoCAD command can be executed at the keyboard by typing the command name
at the Command: prompt and then pressing the Enter key.
7) What is the use of panels in AutoCAD?
Panels are used for selecting AutoCAD commands easily and conveniently. Each panel
contains a group of icons representing different AutoCAD commands. Required AutoCAD
command can be executed by clicking on the corresponding icon in the respective panel.
8) What is the use of pull down menu in AutoCAD?
AutoCAD commands can be easily selected from the pull down menu. Each pull down
menu contains a list of items representing different AutoCAD commands. Required
AutoCAD command can be invoked by clicking on the corresponding item in the
respective pull down menu.

218
 9) Mention the types of co-ordinate systems used in AutoCAD.
1) Absolute co-ordinate system
2) Relative co-ordinate system
3) Relative polar co-ordinate system
10) In ______, the points are located with respect to the origin.
Ans: Absolute co-ordinate system
11) In ______, the co-ordinates of a point are located with reference to the
previous point
Ans: Relative co-ordinate system
12) The absolute co-ordinates are specified by ______ .
Ans: X co-ordinate, Y co-ordinate
13) The relative co-ordinates are specified by ______ .
Ans: @ change in X distance, change in Y distance
14) The relative polar co-ordinates are specified by ______ .
Ans: @ distance < angle in degrees

M
15) ______ command is used to start a new drawing in AutoCAD.

A
Ans: NEW

G
16) ______ command is used to open or load an existing drawing.
Ans: OPEN
PA
17) ______ Command is used to save the current drawing by specifying a file name.
IP
Ans: SAVE
18) ______ command saves the drawing without asking for a file name.
TH

Ans: QSAVE
19) ______ command is used to rename the current drawing.
PA

Ans: SAVEAS
20) ______ command is used to take a print out of a drawing.
L

Ans: PLOT (or) PRINT

A

21) ______ command is used to quit from AutoCAD.

K

Ans: QUIT (or) EXIT

22) ______ command is used to change the display of the objects in the current
drawing.
Ans: ZOOM
23) ______ command is used to set the co-ordinate, angle display formats and
precision.
Ans: UNITS
24) ______ command checks the drawing boundaries and sets them for the current
drawing.
Ans: LIMITS
25) What is the use of LINE command in AutoCAD?
LINE command is used to draw straight line segments of any length by specifying the
end points.

219
26) We can use the ______ option of the LINE command to erase the last line
segment.
Ans: Undo
27) If you exit the LINE command after drawing a line and then select LINE command
again, the ______ can be used to draw a line from the end point of the last line.
Ans: Enter
28) The ______ option of LINE command closes a series of lines, connecting the
last start point and the last end point with a line.
Ans: Close
29) Write the AutoCAD command sequence for drawing a square of 3 units.
Absolute Relative Relative polar
Command : LINE
First point : 0,0 0,0 0,0
Next point : 3,0 @3,0 @3<0
Next point : 3,3 @0,3 @3<90
Next point : 0,3 @–3,0 @3<180

M
Next point : C C C

A
30) Write the AutoCAD command sequence to draw a rectangle of 8 units length

G
and 5 units width from the point (2,3)
Command
First point
:
:
LINE
2,3
PA
IP
Next point : @8<0
Next point : @4<90
TH

Next point : @8<180

Next point : C
PA

31) ______ command is used to draw circles.

Ans: CIRCLE
L

32) Mention any two methods for drawing circles in AutoCAD.

A

1) By giving centre and radius

K

2) By giving any three points on the circle

33) The ______ option of the CIRCLE command is used to draw a circle which is
tangent to any two objects.
Ans: TTR ( Tangent Tangent Radius)
34) Mention any three methods for drawing arcs in AutoCAD.
1) By giving three points on the arc
2) By giving start point, end point and radius
3) By giving start point, centre point and included angle
35) Generally arcs are drawn in ______ direction in AutoCAD.
Ans: anti–clockwise
36) Write the AutoCAD command sequence for drawing an arc passing through
points (5,5), (3.5,6.5) and (2,5).
Command : ARC
Start point : 5,5

220
 Second point : 3.5,6.5
End point : 2,5
37) ______ command is used to draw lines with specified width or thickness.
Ans: PLINE
38) What is the use of POLYGON command?
POLYGON command is used to draw a polygon (closed polyline object) having specified
number of sides.
39) The maximum number of sides a polygon can have in AutoCAD is ______.
Ans: 1024
40) ______ command draws a point object at a specified location.
Ans: POINT
41) State the use of DONUT command.
DONUT command is used to draw two concentric circles with specified diameters, thus
forming a ring.
42) ______ command is used to draw ellipses and elliptical arcs in AutoCAD.

M
Ans: ELLIPSE

A
43) Write down the command sequence to draw an ellipse having one axis end

G
points as (3,5) and (9,5) and half of the another axis distance as 3 units.
Command
Axis end point 1
:
:
ELLIPSE
3,5
PA
Axis end point 2 : 9,5
IP
Other axis distance : 3
TH

44) The ______ command creates a polyline rectangle by specifying the diagonally
opposite corners.
PA

Ans: RECTANG
45) The ______ command is used to create a series of freehand line segments.
L

Ans: SKETCH
A

46) The ______ command is used is used to create two dimensional polylines.
K

Ans: PLINE
47) The ______ command is used to create single line text.
Ans: TEXT
48) The ______ command is used to create multi-line text.
Ans: MTEXT
49) The ______ command is used to create multiple parallel lines.
Ans: MLINE
50) The ______ command is used to create Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines.
Ans: SPLINE
51) What is object snap (Osnap)?
Object snap is used to to quickly locate an exact position on an object without having to
know the coordinate or draw construction lines.
52) List out any four object snap modes.
1) Endpoint 2) Midpoint 3) Center 4) Quadrant 5) Tangent 6) Intersection

221
53) What is the use of polar tracking?
Polar tracking can be used to display temporary alignment paths defined by the specified
polar angles.
54) What is the use SNAP command?
SNAP command is used to restrict the cursor movement to specified intervals.
55) What is the use GRID command?
GRID command displays a dot grid in the current viewport.
56) What is ORTHO mode?
Ortho mode is used to restrict the cursor movement to the horizontal or vertical axis.
57) State any four function keys and their uses in AutoCAD.
Function key Use
F3 OSNAP on or off
F5 ISOPLANE on or off.
F6 COORDS on or off.
F7 GRIDMODE on or off.

M
F8 ORTHOMODE on or off.

A
F9 SNAPMODE on or off.

G
F10 Polar Tracking on or off.
F11
PA
Object Snap Tracking on or off.
58) ______ command creates a selection set of specified group of objects.
IP
Ans: SELECT
TH

59) The ______ selection option is used to select the most recently drawn object
on the screen.
PA

Ans: L (last)
60) With the help of ______ selection option, we can edit the previous set by
reselecting its objects individually.
L

Ans: P (Previous)
A

61) The ______ selection option removes the selected object from the selection
K

set.
Ans: R (Remove)
62) The ______ selection option is used to select all the objects in the drawing
screen.
Ans: All
63) The ______ selection option is used to select objects by touching the object to
be selected with the selection line.
Ans: C (Crossing)
64) The ______ selection option is used to select those objects which lie completely
inside an area specified by two points.
Ans: W (Window)
65) When you select ERASE command or any other editing commands, a small box
known as ______ replaces the screen cursor.
Ans: pick box

222
66) ______ command erases the selected objects from the drawing.
Ans: ERASE
67) What is the use of OOPS command?
OOPS command is used to restore those objects which have been erased by the last
ERASE command.
68) ______ command reverses the effect of previous commands.
Ans: UNDO
69) ______ command is used to reverse the effect of previous command, if it was
UNDO.
Ans: REDO
70) ______ command moves selected objects from one location to another location
by specifying a displacement.
Ans: MOVE
71) State the use of COPY command.
COPY command is used to create a copy of selected objects to another location leaving

M
the original objects intact. Multiple copies can also be created in single COPY command.

A
72) State the use of OFFSET command.

G
OFFSET command is used to create an object parallel to a selected object at a particular

PA
distance or through a particular point. By using this command, parallel lines, offset
curves and concentric circles can be easily created.
73) ______ command is used to rotate selected objects about a base point through
IP
a specified angle.
TH

Ans: ROTATE
74) The size of the existing objects can be changed by using ______ command.
PA

Ans: SCALE
75) What is the use of FILLET command?
L

FILLET command is used to create smooth arcs to connect two non–parallel objects.
A

76) ______ command connects two non–parallel objects with a beveled line.
K

Ans: CHAMFER
77) What is the use of TRIM command?
TRIM command is used to remove the unwanted portions of an object which extend
beyond a specified boundary.
78) ______ command is used to lengthen a selected object to meet another object.
Ans: EXTEND
79) ______ command stretches lines, arcs and polylines by moving the end points
to another specified location.
Ans: STRETCH
80) ______ command is used to change the length of specified object and the
included angle of arcs.
Ans: LENGTHEN
81) State the use of ARRAY command.
ARRAY command is used to create specified number of copies of a selected object.

223
82) What are the two types of arrays used in AutoCAD?
1) Rectangular array 2) Polar array
83) ______ command reflects objects so as to create their mirror image about a
specified line.
Ans: MIRROR
84) ______ command is used to remove specified portion of an object or to split
the objects.
Ans: BREAK
85) What is the use of MEASURE command?
MEASURE command is used to place point objects or blocks at measured intervals on an object.
86) State the use of DIVIDE command.
DIVIDE command is used to divide an object in to a number of segments of equal length
without actually breaking it.
87) ______ command is used to break the compound objects into their component
objects.

M
Ans: EXPLODE

A
88) State the use of REGION command.

G
REGION command is used to convert an object that encloses an area into a region object.
89) What is the use of layers?
PA
Layers are used to organize and separate different types of information within a drawing.
IP
90) ______ command is used to change the properties of selected objects.
Ans: CHPROP (or) CHANGE
TH

91) How can you copy the properties of one object to another object?
The properties of one object can be copied to other objects using MATCHPROP command.
PA

92) ______ command is used to edit 2D polylines, 3D polylines or 3D mesh.

Ans: PEDIT
L

93) What are grips? State their uses.

A

Grips are small, solid-filled squares that appear at strategic points on objects selected
K

with a pointing device. We can drag these grips to stretch, move, rotate, scale, or mirror
objects quickly.
94) What is the use of DIMLINEAR command?
DIMLINEAR command is used to create horizontal, vertical and rotated dimensions.
95) ______ command is used to create aligned dimensions.
Ans : DIMALIGNED
96) What is the use of DIMBASELINE command?
DIMBASELINE creates a series of related dimensions measured from the same baseline.
97) What command is used to create chain dimensioning?
Ans : DIMCONTINUE
98) What is the use of DIMANG command?
DIMNAG is used to create angular dimension between two non parallel lines.
99) How diameter dimension is created?
Diameter dimension is created using DIMDIA command.

224
100) ______ command is used to create radius dimensions.
Ans : DIMRAD
101) What is the use of QLEADER command?
QLEADER command is used to quickly create leaders and leader dimension.
102) How do you change dimensioning styles?
The dimensioning styles can be changed using DDIM command.
103) What is Block in AutoCAD?
Block is a generic term for one or more objects that are combined to create a single object.
104) What is the use of BLOCK command?
BLOCK command displays Block Definition Dialog box which defines and names a block.
105) What is the use of INSERT command?
INSERT command is used to place a drawing or named block into the current drawing. It
displays Insert Dialog box.
106) What is the necessity of hatching in drawings?

M
Hatching is necessary to differentiate the cut area from the uncut portions.

A
107) What is the use of BHATCH command?

G
BHATCH command displays Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box which is used to define

PA
the boundary, pattern type, pattern properties, and attributes for hatch and gradient fill
objects.
IP
108) What is the use of ZOOM command?
ZOOM command is used to increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the
TH

current viewport. It does not change the absolute size of objects in the drawing; it
changes only the magnification of the view.
PA

109) State any three options in ZOOM command.

All: Zooms to display the entire drawing in the current viewport.
L

Extents: Zooms to display the drawing extents and results in the largest possible
A

display of all the objects.

K

Scale: Zooms the display at a specified scale factor.

Window: Zooms to display an area specified by two opposite corners of a window
110) What is the use of REDRAW command?
REDRAW command is used to refresh the display in the current viewport.
111) What is the use of REGEN command?
REGEN command is used to regenerate the entire drawing from the current viewport.
112) How can you shift the location of the view?
We can shift the location of the view by using PAN or by using the window scroll bars.
113) Write the command used to display orthographic and isometric views.
Ans : VIEW
114) How do you measure the distance between two points in a drawing?
The distance between two points can be measured using DIST command.
115) Write the use of AREA command.
AREA command is used to calculate the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas.

225
116) What is the use of CAL command?
CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point, real, or integer expressions.
117) ______ command is used to create multiple viewports.
Ans: VPORTS
118) What is layout in AutoCAD?
Each layout in AutoCAD represents a drawing sheet. We can directly take printout of the
drawing from the layout in a standard drawing sheet.

M
A
G
PA
IP
TH
PA
L
A
K

226
 SHORT QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS (TAMIL)
Unit – I : BASICS OF DRAWING AND DIMENSIONING
1) Why engineering drawing is called language of engineers?
tiuglq;fspd; %yk; xU nghUspd; shape, size, finish, colour, kw;Wk; tbtikg;G
Nghd;wtw;iw Jy;ypakhfTk; njspthfTk; Fwpf;fyhk;. Drawing vd;gJ nghwpahshpd;
idea, design kw;Wk; vz;zq;fis gpwUf;F njhpag;gLj;j cjTk; top MFk;. vdNt
engineering drawing vd;gJ nghwpahsh;fspd; nkhop vdg;gLfpwJ.
2) What is BIS?
BIS MdJ Bureau of Indian Standards vd;gjd; RUf;fk; MFk;. gy;NtW tifahd
nghwpapay; gad;ghLfSf;fhd standardfis ,e;j mikg;G tiuaWj;Js;sJ.
3) Write the IS codes recommended by BIS for engineering drawing.
IS code Name of the drawing subject
IS 9609 – 1983 English lettering

M
IS 10711 – 1983 Size of drawing sheet

A
IS 10713 – 1983 Scales for technical drawings

G
IS 10714 – 1983 General principle of presentation
IS
IS
11664 – 1983
11665 – 1985
PA
Folding of drawing prints
Title block
IP
IS 11669 – 1986 General principle of dimensioning
4) Mention any four drawing instruments.
TH

1) Drawing board 2) Mini drafter 3) Protractor 4) Compass

PA

5) What is the material used for making drawing board?

Oak my;yJ pine Nghd;w kpUJthd ed;F gjdpl;l kuj;Jz;Lfshy; drawing board
nra;ag;gLfpwJ.
L
A

6) What is the use of battens in drawing board?

K

Drawing boardy; cs;s kuj;Jz;Lfis tpyfhky; ,izg;gjw;F mbg;gFjpapy; ,uz;L

battenfs; nghUj;jg;gl;bUf;Fk;.
7) What is the use of ebony edge in drawing board?
T-squared; jiyia ebony edged; kPJ vspjhf efh;j;jp glk; tiuayhk;.
8) What is the purpose of providing saw cut in ebony edge?
#o;epiy khw;wq;fshy; board RUq;FtijAk; tphptiltijAk; jLg;gjw;fhf ebony
edged; ePsthf;fpy; xU rpwpa gpsT Vw;gLj;jg;gl;L ,Uf;Fk;.
9) Mention the standard sizes of drawing boards recommended by BIS.
Board size in mm
Designation
Length x Width x Thickness
D0 1500 x 1000 x 25
D1 1000 x 700 x 25
D2 700 x 500 x 15
D3 500 x 350 x 15

227
10) Name the main parts of T-square.
1) Stock 2) Blade
11) Mention the use of T-square.
Horizontal linefis tiutjw;F T–square Kf;fpakhf gad;gLfpwJ. T-squared; working edge
kPJ set-squarefis efh;j;jp nrq;Fj;J> ,iz kw;Wk; rha;Tf; NfhLfs; tiuag; gLfpd;wd.
12) State the material used for making set - squares.
Set–squares my;yJ triangles MdJ wood, transparent celluloid my;yJ plastic nfhz;L
cUthf;fg;l;bUf;Fk;.
13) What are the two forms of set-squares?
45o set–square kw;Wk; 30o– 60o set–square Mfpait nghJthfg; gad;gLj;jg;gLk;
,uz;L tbtq;fs; MFk;.
14) Write the uses of set-squares.
Set-squarefisf; nfhz;L midj;J tpjkhd Neh;f;NfhLfisAk; tiuayhk;. T-square
kw;Wk; set-squrefisg; gad;gLj;jp nrq;Fj;Jf; NfhLfis tiuayhk;. 15o, 30o, 45o, 60o,

M
75o, 105o Nghd;w Nfhz msTfisAila NfhLfisAk; ,tw;iwg; gad;gLj;jp tiuayhk;.

A
15) What is clinograph? State its uses.

G
Clinograph vd;gJ
xU adjustable set–square MFk;. ve;j xU Nfhzj;jpYk;
,izNfhLfs; tiutjw;F ,J gad;gLfpwJ.
PA
16) Mention the material used for making protractor.
IP
Wood, tin, celluloid my;yJ transparent plastics nfhz;L protractor nra;ag;gl;bUf;Fk;.
TH

17) What is the use of protractor?

Set square gad;gLj;jp tiua ,ayhj Nfhzq;fis tiutjw;Fk; mstpLtjw;Fk; ,J
PA

gad;gLfpwJ. xU tl;lj;ij Fwpg;gpl;l vz;zpf;ifapy; rk ghfq;fshfg; gphpg;gjw;Fk;

protractor gad;gLfpwJ.
18) Write the uses of scales.
L

tiuglj;jpy; ePsq;fs; kw;Wk; J}uq;fis mstpLtjw;Fk; ghpkhw;wk; nra;tjw;Fk; scales

A

gadgLfpd;wd.
K

19) What are french curves?

Campass cjtp nfhz;L tiua ,ayhj tisTfis tiutjw;F french curvefs;
gad;gLfpd;wd.
20) List out the instruments available in an instrument box.
1) Large size compass 2) Lengthening bar 3) Small bow compass
4) Large size divider 5) Small bow divider 6)Inking pen
21) What is the use of large size compass?
,t;tif campasss MdJ circle kw;Wk; arcfis tiutjw;F cjTfpwJ. 120mm tiu
tpl;l msTila tl;lq;fis ,jd; %yk; tiuayhk;.
22) Why the needle is kept longer than the lead point in compass?
NeedleI paperf;Fs; rw;W Eiof;f Ntz;b ,Ug;gjhy;> needle MdJ lead Kidiatpl
rw;W ePskhf ,Uf;f Ntz;Lk;.

228
23) What is the use of lengthening bar?
150mmf;F mjpfkhd Mu msT cs;s tl;lq;fis tiutjw;F lengthening bar
cjTfpwJ.
24) What is the use of small bow compass?
25mmf;F Fiwthd Mu msTs;s tl;lq;fis tiutjw;F small bow compass
gad;gLfpwJ. xNu tpl;l msT nfhz;l rpwpa tl;lq;fis mjpf vz;zpf;ifapy;
tiutjw;F Fwpg;ghf ,J gad;gLfpwJ.
25) List out the uses of large size divider.
Dividerd; gad;ghLfs; fPo;f;fz;lthW :
tisT my;yJ Neh;f;NfhLfis Fwpg;gpl;l vz;zpf;ifapy; rk ghfq;fshfg; gphpf;f
glj;jpd; xU ghfj;jpypUe;J mstPLfis kw;nwhU ghfj;jpw;F ghpkhw;wk; nra;a
Scaley; ,Ue;J xU Fwpg;gpl;l msit glj;jpw;F ghpkhw;wk; nra;a
26) Mention the uses of small bow divider.
Small bow divider MdJ kpfr;rpwpa J}u mstPl;il Fwpf;fTk;> xU Fwpg;gpl;l rk J}u
mstPl;il mjpf vz;zzpf;ifapy; Fwpf;fTk; cjTfpwJ.

M
27) What is the use of small bow ink pen?

A
rpwpa tl;lq;fs; kw;Wk; tl;ltpy;(arc)fis inky; tiutjw;F small bow ink pen gad;gLfpwJ.

G
28) What is the use of inking pen?
PA
Neh;f;NfhLfs; kw;Wk; tl;l tbtkw;w tisTfis tiutjw;F inking pen gad;gLfpwJ.
IP
29) What are the standard sizes of drawing papers recommended by BIS?
Sheet Designation Width x Length (mm)
TH

A0 841 x 1189
PA

A1 594 x 841
A2 420 x 594
A3 297 x 420
L

A4 210 x 297
A

A5 148 x 210
K

30) What is the ratio of length and width of a drawing paper?

xU drawing papery; ePsk; kw;Wk; mfyj;jpw;F ,ilNaahd tpfpjk; 1: √2 MFk;.
31) What is the surface area of A0 size paper?
A0 msT jhspd; Nkw;gug;G xU rJu kPl;lh; MFk;.
32) Mention the ratio of areas of two successive sizes of paper.
mLj;jLj;j msT jhs;fspd; gug;gsthdJ 1:2 vd;w tpfpjj;jpy; ,Uf;Fk;.
33) What are the different grades of pencils?
H, 2H, 3H, … 9H – Hard grade pencils
HB – Medium grade pencils
B, 2B, 3B, … 7B – Soft grade pencils

229
34) List out the uses of different grade pencils.

Pencil grade Uses

3H pencil Guide lines for lettering.
2H pencil Construction lines, dimension lines, leader lines, section lines, and centre lines.
H pencil Object lines, lettering and dimensioning.
HB pencil Free hand sketching, arrow heads, dimensioning and lettering.

35) Mention the two different shapes of pencil lead and give its applications.
Conical point: Sketch work, lettering Nghd;w gad;ghLfSf;F ,j;jifa Kid cjTk;.
Chisel edge: rkr;rPuhd jbkDld; $ba NfhLfis tiutjw;F ,j;jifa Kid
gad;gLtjhy;> nghJthd tiugl NtiyfSf;F ,J Vw;wjhFk;.
36) What is the use of pencil eraser?
ngd;rpy; nfhz;L glk; tiuAk;NghJ> kpUJthd ,e;jpa ug;guhy; nra;ag;gl;l eraser
nghJthfg; gad;gLj;jg; gLfpwJ. Njitaw;w kw;Wk; jtWjyhf tiuag;gl;l
NfhLfis ePf;Ftjw;F eraser gad;gLfpwJ.

M
37) List out the paper fasteners used in drawing.

A
tiuglj; jhis tiuglg; gyifapd; kPJ rhpahfg; nghUj;Jtjw;F drawing pins,

G
adhesive tapes my;yJ spring clips Nghd;wit gad;gLfpd;wd.
38) What is the use of duster? PA
glk; tiuaj; njhlq;Ftjw;F Kd;Gk;> tiue;J nfhz;bUf;Fk;NghJk;> mini-drafter,
IP
set-square, ,ju cgfuzq;fs; kw;Wk; tiuglj;jhspd; Nkw;gug;G Mfpatw;iw Rj;jg;
TH

gLj;Jtjw;F duster gad;gLfpwJ.

39) What is mini-drafter?
PA

Drafting machined; rpwpjhf;fg;gl;l tbtNk mini-drafer MFk;. T–square, set–squares,

scales kw;Wk; protractor Mfpatw;wpd; xd;wpize;j gad;ghLfs; mini-draftery; cs;sd.
L

40) Write the uses of mini-drafter?

A

Mini–drafterIg; gad;gLj;jp tiuglj;jhspd; ve;j ,lj;jpYk;, horizontal, vertical, inclined,

K

parallel, kw;Wk; perpendicular NfhLfis Njitahd ePsj;jpy; vspjpy; tiuayhk;. ,jd;

%yk; glk; tiuAk; Neuk; fzprkhd mstpy; FiwfpwJ.
41) Define lettering.
Title, sub–title, bill of materials, dimensions, notes, kw;Wk; ,ju Kf;fpa tptuq;fis
tiuglj;jpy; Fwpg;gjw;F lettering vd;W ngah;.
42) Give the importance of legible lettering.
njsptpy;yhj lettering MdJ tiugj;jpd; Njhw;wk; kw;Wk; mjd; gad;ghl;il rpijj;J
tpLk;. Mifahy;> nghwpapay; tiuglj;jpy; vspjhf gbf;ff; $bajhfTk;> njspthfTk;>
rkr;rPuhfTk; lettering ,Uf;f Ntz;Lk;.
43) What are single stroke letters?
vOj;Jf;spy; cs;s NfhLfSf;fhd jbkd; ngd;rpypd; xNu tPr;rpy; ngwg;gl;lhy;>
mj;jifa vOj;Jf;fs; single stroke letters vdg;gLk;.

230
44) What are the two types of single stroke letters?
xw;iw tPr;R vOj;Jf;fs; ,uz;L tifg;gLk;: (i) Vertical letters (nrq;Fj;J
vOj;Jf;fs;) (ii) Inclined letters (rha;T vOj;Jf;fs;). fpil kl;lj;jpw;F 75o rha;thf
rha;T vOj;Jf;fs; vOjg;gLfpd;wd.
45) Give the approximate height : width ratio of letters and numerals.
Letters Height : Width
TOM – Q – VAXY 6:6
W 6:8
1&I 6:1
All other letters and numerals 6:5

46) List out the the recommended height of letters for various purposes.
Description Height of letters
Title blocky; cs;s tiuglj;jpd; vz; kw;Wk;
10mm to 12mm
cutting planeIf; Fwpf;Fk; vOj;Jf;fs;
tiuglj;jpd; Kf;fpaj; jiyg;G 6mm to 8mm

M
Jizj; jiyg;Gfs; 3mm to 6mm

A
Fwpg;Gfs; kw;Wk; ghpkhz msTfs; 3mm to 5mm

G
47) What is scaling of drawings?
PA
tiuglq;fis cUthf;Fk;NghJ> nghUl;fis mjd; KO mstpw;Nf vg;nghOJk;
tiua ,ayhJ. rhpahd jfty;fis vspjhf Ghpe;J nfhs;tjw;F ngUk;ghyhd
IP
tiuglq;fis mjd; KO mstpypUe;J rpwpjhf;fpNah my;yJ nghpJ gLj;jpNah tiua
TH

Ntz;bAs;sJ. ,j;jifa nray;Kiw scaling vdg;gLk;.

48) What are the different types of scaling used in drawings?
PA

Full scale: tiuglq;fs; mjd; KO mstpw;Nf tiuag;gLk;.

Reducing scale: tiuglq;fs; mjd; cz;ikahd mstpypUe;J rpwpjhf;fp tiuag;gLk;.
Enlarging scale: tiuglq;fs; mjd; cz;ikahd mstpypUe;J nghpJgLj;jp
L

tiuag;gLk;.
A
K

49) List out the scales recommended by BIS.

Full scale: 1:1
Reducing scales: 1:2, 1:5, 1:10, 1:20, 1:50, 1:100, 1:200, 1:500
Enlarging scales: 50:1, 20:1, 10:1, 5:1, 2:1
50) Define dimensioning.
xU tiuglj;jpd; msTfs; kw;Wk; ,ju tptuq;fis NfhLfs;> glq;fs;> vOj;Jf;fs;>
FwpaPLfs; kw;Wk; Fwpg;Gfs; %yk; Rl;bf;fhl;Lk; Kiwf;F dimensioning vd;W ngah;.
51) Give the IS codes for dimensioning of drawings.
IS:11669–1986 (Dimensioning nra;tjw;fhd nghJthd tpjpfs;) kw;Wk; IS:10718–1983
(Dimensioning tiffs; kw;Wk; tolerance codes) Mfpatw;wpy; tiuaWf;fg; gl;Ls;sthW
tiuglj;jpw;fhd dimensioning Fwpf;fg;LfpwJ.
52) What are object lines or outlines?
Object lines my;yJ outlines vd;git xU nghUspy; fz;Zf;F njhpaf;$ba tpspk;Gfs;>
gug;Gfs; gug;gpd; vy;iyfis tiuag; gad;gLj;jg;gLk; jbkdhd njhlh; NfhLfs; MFk;.

231
53) What is extension line?
xU outliney; ,Ue;J ePl;b tiuag;gLk; nky;ypa njhlh; NfhL extension line MFk;.
54) How notes are written?
glj;jpy; xU ghfj;jpd; Fwpg;gpl;l nray;Kiwiag; gw;wpa jfty;fs; note %yk; Fwpf;fg;
gLfpwJ. ,J vg;nghOJk; fpilkl;lkhfNt vOjg;gLk;.
55) What is leader line? How it is drawn?
Leader line vd;gJ xU Fwpg;igNah my;yJ xU dimensionINah ,izj;J
tiuag;gLk; nky;ypa njhlh; NfhL MFk;. xU nghUspd; outlinefSf;F cl;Gwj;jpy;
,Ue;J tiuAk;NghJ> leader line MdJ xU Gs;spiaf; nfhz;L Kba Ntz;Lk;. xU
nghUspd; outliney; ,Ue;J tiuAk;NghJ> leader line MdJ xU mk;Gf;Fwpiaf;
nfhz;L Kba Ntz;Lk;. xU dimension liney; ,Ue;J tiuAk;NghJ> Gs;sp my;yJ
mk;Gf;Fwp vJTk; ,d;wp Kba Ntz;Lk;.
56) How dimension lines are terminated?
Dimension line MdJ mk;Gf;Fwp> oblique stroke my;yJ njhlf;f Fwpg;gpidf; nfhz;L KbAk;.
57) How arrowhead is drawn?

M
Dimension liney; ,U KidfspYk; mk;Gf;Fwp ,Uf;Fk;. mk;Gf; Fwpapd; ePskhdJ mjd;

A
mjpfgl;r mfyj;ijg; Nghy Rkhh; %d;W klq;F ,Uf;f Ntz;Lk;. mk;Gf; FwpahdJ

G
jpwe;Njh> %bNah> epug;gg;gl;L %bNah ,Uf;fyhk;.
58) How oblique stroke is drawn? PA
45o rha;thd xU rpwpa Nfhlhf oblique stroke tiuag; gLfpwJ.
IP

59) What is origin indication?

TH

Njhuhakhf 3mm tpl;lk; nfhz;l jpwe;j tl;lkhf origin indication tiuag; gLfpwJ.
60) What is aligned system of dimensioning?
PA

,e;j Kiwapy;> tiuglj;jhspd; fPo;g;gf;f tpspk;G my;yJ tyJgf;f tpspk;gpy; ,Ue;J

gbf;Fk; tifapy;> dimension linef;F ,izahf msTfs; Fwpf;fg;gLk;. Dimension
L

lined; kj;jpapy; rw;W Nky; cah;j;jp msTfs; Fwpf;fg;gLk;.

A

61) What is uni-directional system of dimensioning?

K

,e;j Kiwapy;> tiuglj;jhspd; fPo;g;gf;f tpspk;gpy; ,Ue;J gbf;Fk; tifapy; midj;J

msTfSk; Fwpf;fg;gLk;. msTfisf; Fwpg;gjw;fhf dimension lineMdJ mjd;
ikaj;jpy; cilf;fg;glyhk;.
62) What is continuous or chain dimensioning?
,k;Kiwapy;> msTfs; xNu Neh;f;Nfhl;by; Fwpf;fg; gl;bUf;Fk;. mLj;jLj;j
ghpkhzj;jpd; Kjy; extension line MdJ> mjw;F Ke;ija ghpkhzj;jpd; ,uz;lhtJ
extension line Mf mikAk;.
63) What is parallel or baseline dimensioning?
,e;j Kiwapy;> xU nghJthd extension liney; ,Ue;J xd;Wf;Fk; Nkw;gl;l
ghpkhzq;fs; Fwpf;fg;gLk;. Dimension linefs; xd;Wf;nfhd;W ,izahf tiuag;gLk;.
64) How progressive dimensioning is done?
,k;Kiwapy;> datum line MdJ njhlf;ff; FwpaPL (my;yJ Gs;sp) kw;Wk; zero %yk;
Fwpf;fg;gLk;. Datum liney; ,Ue;J Kd;Ndhf;fp nry;YkhW mLj;jLj;j msTfs;
Fwpf;fg;gLk;.
232
65) What is coordinate dimensioning?
,k;Kiwapy;> xU tiuglj;jpy; cs;s gy;NtW ghfq;fspd; mr;Rj; J}uq;fs; kw;Wk;
msTfs; jdpahf xU ml;ltizapy; Fwpf;fg;gLk;. ,jdhy; tiuglj;jpw;F njspthd
kw;Wk; mofhd Njhw;wk; fpilf;fpwJ.
66) How circle is dimensioned?
xU circle MdJ mjd; tpl;lj;jpd; kjpg;igf; Fwpg;gpl;L ghpkhzkplg; gLfpwJ. msTf;F
Kd;G vg;nghOJk; ∅ vd;w FwpaPL ,lk;ngw Ntz;Lk;.
67) How arc is dimensioned?
xU arc MdJ mjd; Mu (radius) kjpg;igf; Fwpg;gpl;L ghpkhzkplg; gLfpwJ. msTf;F
Kd;G vg;nghOJk; R vd;w FwpaPL ,lk;ngw Ntz;Lk;. Mu msitf; Fwpf;Fk; dimension
line MdJ arcd; ikak; topahfr; nrd;W xNu xU mk;Gf;FwpAld; Kbtila Ntz;Lk;.
68) How holes are dimensioned?
Jisfspd; msTfis ghpkhzkpLk;NghJ> mtw;wpd; tpl;lj;jpd; kjpg;NghL Moj;ijAk;
,izj;J Fwpf;f Ntz;Lk;.
69) Sketch the methods of dimensioning chamfers.

M
A
G
PA
IP
30°
TH

3 2 x 45° 2 x 45°

(a)(b) (c)
70) Sketch the methods of dimensioning angles.
PA

12
0°
L

45°
A
K

60° 60°

71) Sketch the methods of dimensioning chord and arcs.

33 60° 36

Chord Angle Arc length

233
72) Sketch the methods of dimensioning bent parts.
32

16
50

150°
R3 R3

13
3 3

50

73) Sketch the methods of dimensioning tapers.

30 30 30

15°

M
Ø40

Ø40

Ø20

Ø20
A
G
Taper 1:4
PA
74) Sketch the methods of dimensioning counter sunk holes.
IP
TH
Ø14

Ø20

Ø14
PA

90°
L
A

3 3
K

75) How the spherical surfaces are dimensioned?

Nfhs tbt gug;gpd; tpl;lk; kw;Wk; Muj;jpd; msTfSf;F Kd;G KiwNa S∅ kw;Wk;
SR vd;w FwpaPL ,lk;ngw Ntz;Lk;.
76) List out any four dimensioning rules.
glj;jpw;F ntspg;Gwk; msTfs; Fwpf;fg;gl Ntz;Lk;.
rpwpa msTfis mLj;J nghpa msTfs; Fwpf;fg;gl Ntz;Lk;.
Dimension linefs; xd;iwnahd;W ntl;bf; nfhs;tij jtph;f;f Ntz;Lk;.
njhlh;r;rpahd rpwpa msTfis mLj;J xU xl;Lnkhj;j msT Fwpf;fg;gl Ntz;Lk;.
kiwe;Js;s NfhLfspy; ,Ue;J msTfis Fwpg;gjw;F gjpyhf> njhpaf;$ba
outlinefspy; ,Ue;J msTfisf; Fwpf;f Ntz;Lk;.
xU axis line my;yJ outlineI vg;nghOJk; dimension lineMf gad;gLj;jf; $lhJ.
tl;lkhf njhpaf;$ba viewy; kl;LNk JisfSf;fhd msTfisf; Fwpf;f Ntz;Lk;.
xU ghfj;jpd; xNu msit ntt;NtW viewfspy; jpUk;gTk; Fwpf;ff; $lhJ.
Fwpg;Gfis vg;nghOJk; fpilkl;lkhfNt vOj Ntz;Lk;.

234
 Unit – II : GEOMETRIC CONSTRUCTIONS AND
CONSTRUCTION OF POLYGONS
1) What is triangle?
xU Kf;Nfhzk; vd;gJ %d;W Neu; NfhLfshy; fl;lg;gl;l xU rkjs tbtk; MFk;.
,jd; %d;W cl;Nfhzq;fspd; $l;Lj;njhif vg;NghJk; 180o MFk;.
2) List out the different types of triangles.
rkgf;f Kf;Nfhzk;: midj;J gf;fq;fSk; rkk; kw;Wk; midj;J Nfhzq;fSk; rkk;.
,Urkgf;f Kf;Nfhzk;: ,uz;L gf;fq;fSk; rkk; kw;Wk; ,uz;L Nfhzq;fs; rkk;.
mrkgf;f Kf;Nfhzk;: rkkhd gf;fq;fSk; ,y;iy kw;Wk; rkkhd Nfhzq;fSk; ,y;iy.
nrq;Nfhz Kf;Nfhzk;: VNjDk; xU Nfhzk; 90° ,Uf;Fk;.
3) What is a quadrilateral?
ehw;fuk; vd;gJ ehd;F Neu;NfhLfshy; fl;lg;gl;l xU rkjs tbtk; MFk;.
4) What is parallelogram?
vjpu; gf;fq;fs; ,izahf ,Uf;Fk; ehw;fukhdJ ,izfuk; vdg;gLk;.

M
5) List out the different types of quadrilaterals.

A
rJuk;: midj;J gf;fq;fSk; rkkhfTk; mUfpYs;s gf;fq;fs; nrq;Fj;jhfTk;

G
,Uf;Fk;.
PA
nrt;tfk;: vjpnujpu; gf;fq;fs; rkkhfTk; mUfpy; cs;s gf;fq;fs;
nrq;Fj;jhfTk; ,Uf;Fk;.
IP
rha;rJuk;;: midj;J gf;fq;fSk; rkkhfTk; vjpu; gf;fq;fs; ,izahfTk;
kw;Wk; vjpu; Nfhzq;fs; rkkhfTk; ,Uf;Fk;.
TH

rha;nrt;tfk;: vjpnujpu; gf;fq;fs; ,izahfTk; kw;Wk; rkkhfTk;> vjpu;

Nfhzq;fs; rkkhfTk; ,Uf;Fk;.
PA

rhptfk;;: vjpnujpNu cs;s ,uz;L gf;fq;fs; ,izahf ,Uf;Fk;.

6) Define polygon.
L

gy Neh;f;NfhLfshy; #og;gl;l rkjs tbtk; gy;Nfhzk; MFk;.

A

7) What is regular polygon?

K

xU gy;Nfhzk; rk gf;fq;fisAk; rk Nfhzq;fisAk; nfhz;bUe;jhy;> mJ Kiwahd

gy;Nfhzk; vdg;gLk;.
8) List out the different types of polygons.
j) Kf;Nfhzk; (Triangle) : 3 gf;fq;fs; k) rJuk; (Square) : 4 gf;fq;fs;
l) Iq;Nfhzk; (Pentagon) : 5 gf;fq;fs; m) mWNfhzk; (Hexagon) : 6 gf;fq;fs;
n) vONfhzk; (Heptagon) : 7 gf;fq;fs; o) vz;Nfhzk; (Octagon) : 8 gf;fq;fs;
p) etNfhzk; (Nonagon) : 9 gf;fq;fs; q) jrNfhzk; (Decagon) : 10 gf;fq;fs;
r) rkjrNfhzk; (Dodecagon) : 12 gf;fq;fs;

235
 Unit – III : BASICS OF COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN

1) What is AutoCAD?
Autodesk vd;Dk; mnkhpf;f epWtdj;jhy; cUthf;fg;gl;l xU fzpg;nghwp gad;ghl;L
nkd;nghUs; AutoCAD MFk;.
2) List out the applications of AutoCAD.
fl;blq;fs;> mizfs;> tisTfs; Nghd;wtw;wpd; tbtikg;gpy; ,J fl;bl
nghwpahsh;fshy; gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
,ae;jpu ghfq;fs;> mnrk;gpsp> Ml;Nlhnkhigy; cjpupghfq;fs;> Efu;Nthu;
nghUl;fs; Nghd;wtw;wpd; tbtikg;gpy; ,J ,ae;jpu nghwpahsu;fshy; gad;gLj;jg;
gLfpwJ.
,J PCB fspd; tbtikg;gpy; vyf;l;uhdpf;]; nghwpahsuhy; gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
kpd; taupq; Rw;Wfspd; tbtikg;gpy; ,J kpd; nghwpahsu;fshy; gad;gLj;jg;
gLfpwJ.
,J 3D khjpupfs; Nghd;wtw;iw cUthf;Ftjw;F jpiug;glj; Jiwapy; cs;s fiy
,af;Feu;fshy; gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.

M
3) What are the advantages of AutoCAD? (or) What is the need for AutoCAD?

A
7) kpf NtfkhfTk; vspjhfTk; tiuglq;fis cUthf;fyhk;.

G
8) kpfj; Jy;ypakhd kw;Wk; kpfr;rhpahd tiugq;fis cUthf;fyhk;.
PA
9) Vw;fdNt cs;s glq;fis vspjpy; Nkk;gLj;jyhk;.
10) tiuglq;fSf;F vspjhf ghpkhz mstplyhk;.
IP
11) tiuglq;fis ghJfhj;J gad;gLj;Jjy; kpfTk; vspJ.
12) tiufiy mYtYf cw;gj;jp jpwd; mjpfhpf;fpwJ.
TH

4) How do you start AutoCAD in Windows?

3) Desktopy; cs;s AutoCAD iconI ,UKiw click nra;J
PA

4) gpd;tUkhW click nra;J: Start button ➤ All Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD2010

5) What are the methods used to execute an AutoCAD command?
L

fPo;f;fz;l topfspy; AutoCAD fl;lisfis cs;sPL nra;ayhkk;:

A

1) Keyboard 2) Panels 3) Pull down menu

K

6) What is the use of Command: prompt in AutoCAD?

ve;j xU AutoCAD fl;lisiaAk; key board cjtpahy; Command: prompty; type
nra;j gpd;G Enter keyI mOj;jp cs;sPL nra;ayhk;;.
7) What is the use of panels in AutoCAD?
AutoCAD fl;lisfis vspjhfTk; trjpahfTk; Njh;T nra;a panel gad;gLfpwJ.
xt;nthU panelYk; ntt;NtW AutoCAD fl;lisfisf; Fwpf;Fk; gy iconfs; ,Uf;Fk;.
Njitahd AutoCAD fl;lisia Njh;T nra;a> panely; mjw;nfd chpa iconI click
nra;a Ntz;Lk;.
8) What is the use of pull down menu in AutoCAD?
AutoCAD fl;lisfis vspjhf Njh;T nra;a pull down menu gad;gLfpwJ. xt;nthU
pull down menutpYk; ntt;NtW AutoCAD fl;lisfisf; Fwpf;Fk; gy itemfs;
,Uf;Fk;. Njitahd AutoCAD fl;lisia Njh;T nra;a> pull down menuy; mjw;nfd
chpa itemj;ij click nra;a Ntz;Lk;.

236
 9) Mention the types of co-ordinate systems used in AutoCAD.
4) Absolute co-ordinate system
5) Relative co-ordinate system
6) Relative polar co-ordinate system
10) In ______, the points are located with respect to the origin.
Ans: Absolute co-ordinate system
11) In ______, the co-ordinates of a point are located with reference to the
previous point
Ans: Relative co-ordinate system
12) The absolute co-ordinates are specified by ______ .
Ans: X co-ordinate, Y co-ordinate
13) The relative co-ordinates are specified by ______ .
Ans: @ change in X distance, change in Y distance
14) The relative polar co-ordinates are specified by ______ .
Ans: @ distance < angle in degrees

M
15) ______ command is used to start a new drawing in AutoCAD.

A
Ans: NEW

G
16) ______ command is used to open or load an existing drawing.
Ans: OPEN
PA
17) ______ Command is used to save the current drawing by specifying a file name.
IP
Ans: SAVE
18) ______ command saves the drawing without asking for a file name.
TH

Ans: QSAVE
19) ______ command is used to rename the current drawing.
PA

Ans: SAVEAS
20) ______ command is used to take a print out of a drawing.
L

Ans: PLOT (or) PRINT

A

21) ______ command is used to quit from AutoCAD.

K

Ans: QUIT (or) EXIT

22) ______ command is used to change the display of the objects in the current
drawing.
Ans: ZOOM
23) ______ command is used to set the co-ordinate, angle display formats and
precision.
Ans: UNITS
24) ______ command checks the drawing boundaries and sets them for the current
drawing.
Ans: LIMITS
25) What is the use of LINE command in AutoCAD?
,uz;L Gs;spfisf; nfhLg;gjd; %yk; ve;j xU ePsj;jpYk; Nfhl;Lj;Jz;Lfis
tiua LINE fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ.

237
26) We can use the ______ option of the LINE command to erase the last line
segment.
Ans: Undo
27) If you exit the LINE command after drawing a line and then select LINE
command again, the ______ can be used to draw a line from the end point of
the last line.
Ans: Enter
28) The ______ option of LINE command closes a series of lines, connecting the
last start point and the last end point with a line.
Ans: Close
29) Write the AutoCAD command sequence for drawing a square of 3 units.
Absolute Relative Relative polar
Command : LINE
First point : 0,0 0,0 0,0
Next point : 3,0 @3,0 @3<0
Next point : 3,3 @0,3 @3<90

M
Next point : 0,3 @–3,0 @3<180

A
Next point : C C C

G
30) Write the AutoCAD command sequence to draw a rectangle of 8 units length
and 5 units width from the point (2,3)
Command : LINE
PA
IP
First point : 2,3
Next point : @8<0
TH

Next point : @4<90

Next point : @8<180
PA

Next point : C
31) ______ command is used to draw circles.
L

Ans: CIRCLE
A

32) Mention any two methods for drawing circles in AutoCAD.

K

3) tl;lj;jpd; ikak; kw;Wk; Mu msTfisf; nfhLg;gjd; %yk;.

4) tl;lg; ghpjpapy; mikAk; VNjDk; %d;W Gs;spfis nfhLg;gjd; %yk;.
33) The ______ option of the CIRCLE command is used to draw a circle which is
tangent to any two objects.
Ans: TTR ( Tangent Tangent Radius)
34) Mention any three methods for drawing arcs in AutoCAD.
4) tl;ltpy;ypd; kPJs;s VNjDk; %d;W Gs;spfis nfhLg;gjd; %yk;
5) njhlf;fg; Gs;sp> KbTg; Gs;sp kw;Wk; Mu msit nfhLg;gjd; %yk;.
6) njhlf;fg; Gs;sp> ikag; Gs;sp kw;Wk; ,ilg;gl;l Nfhz msitf; nfhLg;gjd; %yk;.
35) Generally arcs are drawn in ______ direction in AutoCAD.
Ans: anti–clockwise
36) Write the AutoCAD command sequence for drawing an arc passing through
points (5,5), (3.5,6.5) and (2,5).
Command : ARC

238
 Start point : 5,5
Second point : 3.5,6.5
End point : 2,5
37) ______ command is used to draw lines with specified width or thickness.
Ans: PLINE
38) What is the use of POLYGON command?
xU Fwpg;gpl;l vz;zpf;ifapy; gf;fq;fs; cila rPuhd gy;Nfhzq;fs; tiutjw;F
POLYGON fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ.
39) The maximum number of sides a polygon can have in AutoCAD is ______.
Ans: 1024
40) ______ command draws a point object at a specified location.
Ans: POINT
41) State the use of DONUT command.
Fwpg;gpl;l tpl;l msTfis cila ,uz;L nghJ ika tl;lq;;fis xNu Neuj;jpy;
tiutjw;F DONUT fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ.

M
42) ______ command is used to draw ellipses and elliptical arcs in AutoCAD.

A
Ans: ELLIPSE

G
43) Write down the command sequence to draw an ellipse having one axis end

Command : ELLIPSE
PA
points as (3,5) and (9,5) and half of the another axis distance as 3 units.

Axis end point 1 : 3,5

IP
Axis end point 2 : 9,5
TH

Other axis distance : 3

44) The ______ command creates a polyline rectangle by specifying the diagonally
PA

opposite corners.
Ans: RECTANG
45) The ______ command is used to create a series of freehand line segments.
L
A

Ans: SKETCH
K

46) The ______ command is used is used to create two dimensional polylines.
Ans: PLINE
47) The ______ command is used to create single line text.
Ans: TEXT
48) The ______ command is used to create multi-line text.
Ans: MTEXT
49) The ______ command is used to create multiple parallel lines.
Ans: MLINE
50) The ______ command is used to create Non-Uniform Raional B-Splines.
Ans: SPLINE
51) What is object snap (Osnap)?
Object snap vd;gJ xU nghUspd; kPJ xU Gs;spia mjd; mr;Rj; J}uq;fis cs;sPL
nra;ahky; my;yJ fl;Lkhdf; NfhLfis tiuahky;> Jy;ypakhfTk; tpiuthfTk;
fz;lwpa gad;gLfpwJ.

239
52) List out any four object snap modes.
1) Endpoint 2) Midpoint 3) Center 4) Quadrant 5) Tangent 6) Intersection
53) What is the use of polar tracking?
Fwpg;gpl;l Nfhzq;fshy; tiuaWf;fg;gl;l jw;fhypf ghijfisf; fhl;l polar tracking
gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
54) What is the use SNAP command?
Cursord; ,af;fj;ij Fwpg;gpl;l ,ilntspapy; efUkhW fl;Lg;gLj;j SNAP fl;lis
gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
55) What is the use GRID command?
jw;Nghija viewporty; Gs;spfshy; Md gridI Njhw;Wtpf;f GRID fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ.
56) What is ORTHO mode?
Cursord; ,af;fj;ij fpilkl;l kw;Wk; nrq;Fj;J mr;Rfspy; kl;Lk; efUkhW
fl;Lg;gLj;j ORTHO mode gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
57) State any four function keys and their uses in AutoCAD.
Function key Use

M
F3 OSNAP on or off

A
F5 ISOPLANE on or off.
F6 COORDS on or off.

G
F7 GRIDMODE on or off.
F8 PA
ORTHOMODE on or off.
F9 SNAPMODE on or off.
IP
F10 Polar Tracking on or off.
TH

F11 Object Snap Tracking on or off.

58) ______ command creates a selection set of specified group of objects.
PA

Ans: SELECT
59) The ______ selection option is used to select the most recently drawn object
on the screen.
L

Ans: L (last)
A

60) With the help of ______ selection option, we can edit the previous set by
K

reselecting its objects individually.

Ans: P (Previous)
61) The ______ selection option removes the selected object from the selection
set.
Ans: R (Remove)
62) The ______ selection option is used to select all the objects in the drawing
screen.
Ans: All
63) The ______ selection option is used to select objects by touching the object to
be selected with the selection line.
Ans: C (Crossing)
64) The ______ selection option is used to select those objects which lie completely
inside an area specified by two points.
Ans: W (Window)

240
65) When you select ERASE command or any other editing commands, a small box
known as ______ replaces the screen cursor.
Ans: pick box
66) ______ command erases the selected objects from the drawing.
Ans: ERASE
67) What is the use of OOPS command?
filrp ERASE fl;lis %yk; mopf;fg;gl;l gl cutq;fis jpUk;gTk; jpiuapy; nfhz;L
tu OOPS fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ.
68) ______ command reverses the effect of previous commands.
Ans: UNDO
69) ______ command is used to reverse the effect of previous command, if it was
UNDO.
Ans: REDO
70) ______ command moves selected objects from one location to another location
by specifying a displacement.

M
Ans: MOVE

A
71) State the use of COPY command.

G
Njh;e;njLf;fg;gl;l gl cUtq;fspd; gpujpia NtnwhU ,lj;jpy; cUthf;f COPY fl;lis
gad;gLfpwJ. xU COPY fl;lis %yk; gl cUtq;fspd; gy gpujpfisAk; cUthf;f KbAk;.
72) State the use of OFFSET command.
PA
IP
Njh;e;njLf;fg;gl;l xU gl cUtj;jpw;F ,izahf mNj tbtk; nfhz;l gl cUtj;ij
Fwpg;gpl;l J}uj;jpy; my;yJ VNjDk; xU Gs;sp topahf nry;YkhW cUthf;f OFFSET
TH

fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ. ,e;j fl;lisiag; gad;gLj;jp ,izNfhLfs;> ,iz

tisTfs; kw;Wk; nghJ ika tl;lq;fs; Mfpatw;iw vspjhf cUthf;fyhk;.
PA

73) ______ command is used to rotate selected objects about a base point through
a specified angle.
Ans: ROTATE
L
A

74) The size of the existing objects can be changed by using ______ command.
K

Ans: SCALE
75) What is the use of FILLET command?
,izaw;w ,uz;L gl cUtq;fis mit ,uz;Lf;Fk; nghJthd xU nky;ypa
tisT tiue;J ,izg;gjw;F FILLET fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ.
76) ______ command connects two non–parallel objects with a beveled line.
Ans: CHAMFER
77) What is the use of TRIM command?
xU tiuglj;jpy; Fwpg;gpl;l vy;iyf;F mg;ghy; ePl;bf;fg;gLk; Njitaw;w gFjpfis
mfw;w TRIM fl;lis gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
78) ______ command is used to lengthen a selected object to meet another object.
Ans: EXTEND
79) ______ command stretches lines, arcs and polylines by moving the end points
to another specified location.
Ans: STRETCH

241
80) ______ command is used to change the length of specified object and the
included angle of arcs.
Ans: LENGTHEN
81) State the use of ARRAY command.
Nju;e;njLf;fg;gl;l gl cUtq;fspd; Fwpg;gpl;l vz;zpf;ifapyhd efy;fis cUthf;f
ARRAY fl;lis gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
82) What are the two types of arrays used in AutoCAD?
1) Rectangular array 2) Polar array
83) ______ command reflects objects so as to create their mirror image about a
specified line.
Ans: MIRROR
84) ______ command is used to remove specified portion of an object or to split
the objects.
Ans: BREAK
85) What is the use of MEASURE command?

M
xU gl cUtj;jpd; kPJ mstplg;gl;l ,ilntspapy; Gs;sp my;yJ blockfis itf;f

A
MEASURE fl;lis gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.

G
86) State the use of DIVIDE command.
xU gl cUtj;ij cilf;fhky; mjid rk ePsk; nfhz;l gy gpupTfshfg; gpupg;gw;F
DIVIDE fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ. PA
87) ______ command is used to break the compound objects into their component
IP
objects.
TH

Ans: EXPLODE
88) State the use of REGION command.
PA

xU gug;ig cs;slf;fpa gl cUtj;ij xU %ba gFjpahf khw;Wtjw;F REGION

fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ.
L

89) What is the use of layers?

A

xU tiuglj;jpw;Fs; gy;NtW tifahd jfty;fis xOq;fikf;fTk; gpupf;fTk;

layerfs; gad;gLj;jg;gLfpd;wd.
K

90) ______ command is used to change the properties of selected objects.

Ans: CHPROP (or) CHANGE
91) How can you copy the properties of one object to another object?
MATCHPROP fl;lisiag; gad;gLj;jp xU gl cUtj;jpd; gz;Gfis kw;w gl
cUtq;fSf;F khw;wyhk;.
92) ______ command is used to edit 2D polylines, 3D polylines or 3D mesh.
Ans: PEDIT
93) What are grips? State their uses.
Grips vd;git rpwpa> jpl-epug;gg;gl;l rJuq;fs; MFk;. Mouse %yk; Nju;e;njLf;fg;gl;l
glq;fspd; kPJ Kf;fpa Gs;spfspy; ,it Njhd;Wk;. gl cUtq;fis tpiuthf ePl;l> efu;j;j>
Row;w> mstpid khw;w my;yJ gpujpgpk;gk; Vw;gLj;j ,e;j gripfis ehk; ,Of;fyhk;.
94) What is the use of DIMLINEAR command?
fpilkl;l> nrq;Fj;J kw;Wk; Row;wg;gl;l gupkhzq;fis cUthf;f DIMLINEAR
fl;lis gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
242
95) ______ command is used to create aligned dimensions.
Ans : DIMALIGNED
96) What is the use of DIMBASELINE command?
xNu mbg;gil Nfhl;by; ,Ue;J mstplg;gLk; njhlu;Gila gupkhzq;fspd;
tupiria cUthf;f DIMBASELINE fl;lis cjTfpwJ.
97) What command is used to create chain dimensioning?
Ans : DIMCONTINUE
98) What is the use of DIMANG command?
,uz;L ,iz my;yhj NfhLfSf;F ,ilNa Nfhz gupkhzj;ij cUthf;f
DIMNAG fl;lis gad;gLfpwJ.
99) How diameter dimension is created?
DIMDIA fl;lisia gad;gLj;jp tpl;lk; ghpkhzk; cUthf;fg; gLfpwJ.
100) ______ command is used to create radius dimensions.
Ans : DIMRAD
101) What is the use of QLEADER command?

M
Leader kw;Wk; leader gupkhzj;ij tpiuthf cUthf;f QLEADER fl;lis

A
gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.

G
102) How do you change dimensioning styles?

PA
DDIM fl;lisiag; gad;gLj;jp gupkhz gz;Gfis khw;wyhk;.
103) What is Block in AutoCAD?
IP
Block vd;gJ xd;W my;yJ mjw;F Nkw;gl;l gl cUtq;fis xd;wpizj;J xNu gl
cUtj;ij cUthf;Ftjw;fhd nghJthd nrhy;.
TH

104) What is the use of BLOCK command?

BLOCK fl;lisahdJ Block Definition Dialog boxI fhz;gpf;Fk;. ,jd; %yk; block
PA

tiuaWf;fg;gl;L ngahplg;gLk;.
105) What is the use of INSERT command?
L

jw;Nghija tiuglj;jpy; xU gl cUtk; my;yJ ngauplg;gl;l blockI nrUFtjw;F

A

INSERT fl;lis gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ. ,J Insert Dialog boxI fhl;LfpwJ.

K

106) What is the necessity of hatching in drawings?

ntl;lg;gl;l gFjpia ntl;lg;glhj gFjpapypUe;J NtWgLj;Jtjw;F hatching
mtrpak; MFk;.
107) What is the use of BHATCH command?
BHATCH fl;lisahdJ Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box I fhl;Lk;. ,jd; %yk;
vy;iy> pattern tif> pattern gz;Gfs;> kw;Wk; hatch gz;Gfs; Mfpait
tiuaWf;fg;gLk;.
108) What is the use of ZOOM command?
ZOOM fl;lisahdJ jw;Nghija viewporty; cs;s gl cUtq;fspd;
ntspg;gilahd msit mjpfupf;f my;yJ Fiwf;f gad;gLfpwJ. ,J
tiuglj;jpy; cs;s gl cUtq;fspd; cz;ikahd khw;whJ. ,J viewd;
cUg;ngUf;fj;ij kl;LNk khw;WfpwJ.
109) State any three options in ZOOM command.
All: jw;Nghija viewporty; KO tiuglj;ijAk; fhz;gpf;FkhW ngupjhf;FfpwJ.

243
 Extents: tiuglj;jpy; cs;s midj;J gl cUtq;fSk; cs;slq;Fk; tifapy;
rhj;jpakhd mjpfgl;r cUg;ngUf;fj;ij fhz;gpf;Fk;.
Scale: xU Fwpg;gpl;l klq;fpy; fhl;rpia ngupjhf;FfpwJ.
Window: xU windowtpd; ,uz;L vjpu; %iyfshy; Fwpg;gplg;gl;l gFjpiaf;
fhz;gpf;f ngupjhf;FfpwJ
110) What is the use of REDRAW command?
REDRAW fl;lisahdJ jw;Nghija viewporty; fhl;rpiag; GJg;gpf;fg;
gad;gLfpwJ.
111) What is the use of REGEN command?
jw;Nghija viewporty; ,Uf;Fk; KO tiuglj;ijAk; kPz;Lk; GJg;gpj;J cUthf;f
REGEN fl;lis gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
112) How can you shift the location of the view?
PAN fl;lisia gad;gLj;jp my;yJ window scroll barfis gad;gLj;jp fhl;rpapd;
,Ug;gplj;ij khw;wyhk;.
113) Write the command used to display orthographic and isometric views.

M
Ans : VIEW
114) How do you measure the distance between two points in a drawing?

A
,uz;L Gs;spfSf;F ,ilapyhd J}uj;ij DIST fl;lisiag; gad;gLj;jp mstplyhk;.

G
115) Write the use of AREA command.
PA
gl cUtq;fs; my;yJ tiuaWf;fg;gl;l gFjpfspd; gug;gsT kw;Wk; Rw;wsitf;
fzf;fpl AREA fl;lis gad;gLj;jg;gLfpwJ.
IP
116) What is the use of CAL command?
TH

CAL vd;gJ Gs;sp> ,ay; vz; my;yJ KO vz; fzf;fPLfis kjpg;gpLk; Md;iyd;
tbtpay; fhy;FNyl;luhFk;.
PA

117) ______ command is used to create multiple viewports.

Ans: VPORTS
118) What is layout in AutoCAD?
L
A

AutoCADy; cs;s xt;nthU layoutk; xU tiugl jhisf; Fwpf;fpwJ. xU layouty;

cs;s tiuglj;ij Neubahf xU epiyahd tiuglj; jhspy; print out vLf;fyhk;.
K

244
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER – I

Course : Second Semester Mechanical Engineering Time : 3 Hrs.

Subject : Drafting Practices Max. Marks : 100

PART – A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

[N.B : (1) Answer all questions

(2) Each question carries 1 mark. ]

1. What is BIS?
2. Mention any four drawing instruments.
3. Write any three IS codes recommended by BIS for engineering drawing.
4. What is the use of battens in drawing board?
5. Write the uses of set-squares.

M
6. What are the standard sizes of drawing papers recommended by BIS?

A
7. What are the different grades of pencils?

G
8. Write the uses of mini-drafter?
9. What are single stroke letters? PA
10. What is continuous or chain dimensioning?
IP

11. How progressive dimensioning is done?

TH

12. List out any four dimensioning rules.

PA

13. List out the different types of polygons.

14. What are the methods used to execute an AutoCAD command?
L

15. Mention the types of co-ordinate systems used in AutoCAD.

A

16. ______ command is used to set the co-ordinate, angle display formats and
K

precision.
17. Write the AutoCAD command sequence to draw a rectangle of 8 units length
and 5 units width from the point (2,3).
18. The ______ option of the CIRCLE command is used to draw a circle which is
tangent to any two objects.
19. The maximum number of sides a polygon can have in AutoCAD is ______.
20. What is object snap (Osnap)?
21. State the use of OFFSET command.
22. What are the two types of arrays used in AutoCAD?
23. What is the use of QLEADER command?
24. What is Block in AutoCAD?
25. State any three options in ZOOM command.

245
 PART – B (COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING)

[N.B : Answer all questions using CAD software

1. Redraw the drawing shown in Fig.1 and dimension it as per BIS using CAD.
(25 Marks)
2. The pictorial view of a component is shown in Fig.2. Draw its front view, top view
and right side view using CAD. (45 Marks)

Viva – Voce (5 Marks)

DRAWINGS

(All dimensions are in mm)

M
A
G
130
20
PA
IP
20

45
TH

Ø35
PA

15 R40
30

60°
30
L
A

120
75
K

Fig.1 Fig.2

246
 MODEL QUESTION PAPER – II

Course : Second Semester EEE Time : 3 Hrs.

Subject : Drafting Practices Max. Marks : 100

PART – A (SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS)

[N.B : (1) Answer all questions

(2) Each question carries 1 mark. ]

1. What is BIS?
2. Mention any four drawing instruments.
3. Write any three IS codes recommended by BIS for engineering drawing.
4. What is the use of battens in drawing board?
5. Write the uses of set-squares.

M
6. What are the standard sizes of drawing papers recommended by BIS?

A
7. What are the different grades of pencils?

G
8. Write the uses of mini-drafter?
9. What are single stroke letters? PA
10. What is continuous or chain dimensioning?
IP

11. How progressive dimensioning is done?

TH

12. List out any four dimensioning rules.

PA

13. List out the different types of polygons.

14. What are the methods used to execute an AutoCAD command?
L

15. Mention the types of co-ordinate systems used in AutoCAD.

A

16. ______ command is used to set the co-ordinate, angle display formats and
K

precision.
17. Write the AutoCAD command sequence to draw a rectangle of 8 units length
and 5 units width from the point (2,3)
18. The ______ option of the CIRCLE command is used to draw a circle which is
tangent to any two objects.
19. The maximum number of sides a polygon can have in AutoCAD is ______.
20. What is object snap (Osnap)?
21. State the use of OFFSET command.
22. What are the two types of arrays used in AutoCAD?
23. What is the use of QLEADER command?
24. What is Block in AutoCAD?
25. State any three options in ZOOM command.

247
 PART – B (COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING)
[N.B : Answer all questions using CAD software

1. Redraw the drawing shown in Fig.1 and dimension it as per BIS using CAD.
(25 Marks)
2. Draw the stair-case wiring electric circuit diagram shown in Fig.2 using CAD.
(45 Marks)
Viva – Voce (5 Marks)

DRAWINGS
(All dimensions are in mm)

10
Ø30

10
Ø12

M
30

20
A
G
15R 25

PA 30
IP
25
TH

Fig.1
PA

L1 L2 L3
L
A
K

N
P

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6

SB1 SB 2 SB 3 SB 4

N - Neutral P - Phase S - Switch

SB - Switch Board L - Light Bulb

Fig.2 Staircase Wiring Electric Circuit

248
K
A
L
PA
TH
IP
PA
G
A
M